2007 chevrolet optra owner manual m - general motors · pdf file2007 chevrolet optra owner...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 38Airbag System ........................................ 66Restraint System Check ......................... 84

Features and Controls ................................ 87Keys ....................................................... 89Doors and Locks .................................... 95Windows ............................................... 100Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 103Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 105

Mirrors .................................................. 123Storage Areas ...................................... 126Sunroof ................................................ 131

Instrument Panel ....................................... 133Instrument Panel Overview ................... 136Climate Controls ................................... 155Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 161Audio System(s) ................................... 178

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 205Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 206Towing ................................................. 241

2007 Chevrolet Optra Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 245Service ................................................. 248Fuel ...................................................... 251Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 256Headlamp Aiming ................................. 290Bulb Replacement ................................ 290Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 302Tires ..................................................... 303Appearance Care .................................. 335Vehicle Identification ............................. 344

Electrical System .................................. 345Capacities and Specifications ................ 352Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................ 353

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 355Maintenance Schedule .......................... 356

Customer Assistance Information ............. 387Customer Assistance and Information ..... 388Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 405

Index .......................................................... 409

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, and the CHEVROLET Emblem areregistered trademarks; and the name OPTRAis a trademark of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15876626 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats

(With Sliding Storage Tray) ........................ 9Manual Seats

(Without Sliding Storage Tray) ................. 10Driver Seat Tilt Adjuster .............................. 11Manual Lumbar ........................................... 12Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Rear Seat Operation ................................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23Driver Position ............................................. 23Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33Center Rear Passenger Position

(Hatchback Only) ..................................... 36Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 37Safety Belt Extender ................................... 37

Child Restraints ............................................ 38Older Children ............................................. 38Infants and Young Children ......................... 41Child Restraint Systems .............................. 45Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 50Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 51Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 59Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 62

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 66Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 69When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 73How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 73What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 74Passenger Sensing System ......................... 76

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 82Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 83Restraint System Check ............................... 84

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 85

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats(With Sliding Storage Tray)

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

If your vehicle has a sliding storage tray under thefront seat, the manual seat lever looks like this.

Pull up and hold thelever located under thefront of the seat tounlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe lever. Then try to move the seat with yourbody, to make sure the seat is locked into place.

9

Manual Seats(Without Sliding Storage Tray)

{CAUTION:


If your vehicle does not have a sliding storage trayunder the front seat, the manual seat bar lookslike this.

Pull up and hold the barlocated under the front ofthe seat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe bar. Then try to move the seat with your body,to make sure the seat is locked into place.

10

Driver Seat Tilt Adjuster

The manual drivers seat tilt adjuster knobs arelocated on the outboard side of the seat cushion.

Turn the front knob to adjust the tilt of the frontportion of the seat cushion. Turn the rear knob toadjust the tilt of the rear portion of the seatcushion.

11

Manual LumbarYour vehicle may have manually operated lumbarsupport for the driver’s seat.

To adjust the front seat lumbar support, use thelever located on the outboard side of the seatback.

Push the lever down to adjust the support forthe lower part of the seatback. Pull the lever up toreturn the support to its original position.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

12

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

14

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower therestraint, press the button, located on the topof the seatback, and push the restraint down.

The rear seat head restraints may be adjustableand work the same as the front head restraints.

The head restraints are removable. To remove arestraint, press the button, located on the topof the seatback, and lift the head restraint from theguide sleeve. Replace the head restraint beforedriving.

15

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationYour vehicle has rear seatbacks that can befolded down to provide an extended cargo area.

To fold down the seatback, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage tothe seat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Push the rear head restraints downcompletely.

2. Detach the safety belt in the rear center seatposition. Press the button in the buckle torelease the latch plate from the buckle.

3. Press the releasebutton located ontop of the rearseatback.

4. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.

16

To return the seatback to the upright position,do the following:

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Lift the seatback up and push firmly on thetop of the seatback until it latches securelyin the fully upright position.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

2. Make sure that the safety belts are not twistedor caught under the seatback.

3. Reattach the rear center safety belt. Push thelatch plate at the end of the safety belt strapinto the buckle with the release buttonuntil the mechanism clicks. Make sure thestrap is not twisted. The sliding latchplate should face the front of the vehicle.

17

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 164.

18

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

19

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

20

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

21

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

22

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 38 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 41. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

23

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 37.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustmenton page 31.

24

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt. It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety belt through the latchplate to fully tighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

25

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

26


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

27


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

28


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

29


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

30

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

31

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionThe right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt. To learn howto wear the right front passenger’s safety beltproperly see, Driver Position on page 23.

32

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

33

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Be sure you are using the correctbuckle and that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 37.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

34

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

35

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle.

Center Rear Passenger Position(Hatchback Only)If you have a hatchback model, your vehicle has aretractable safety belt in the center rear seatingposition.

Here is how to use the center rear safety belt.

1. Pull the center rear safety belt from theretractor.

2. Push the latch plate at the end of the safetybelt strap into the buckle with the blackrelease button until the mechanism clicks.Make sure the safety belt webbing isnot twisted. The sliding latch plate will facethe front of the vehicle.

3. Pick up the sliding latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

4. Push the latch plate into the red bucklemarked CENTER.If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,tilt the latch plate and keep pulling untilyou can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up onthe shoulder part.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 85.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. For moreinformation see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

37

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wearsafety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide.The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching the top of thethighs. It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

38

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the centerrear seat passenger position, move the childtoward the safety belt buckle. In either case,be sure that the shoulder belt still is onthe child’s shoulder, so that in a crash thechild’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

40

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

41

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it.For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

42

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

43

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

44

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

45

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

46

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

47

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

48

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure thechild is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

49

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This is

CAUTION: (Continued)


because the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certain conditions,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

50

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors orthe safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

51

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

52

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. In theUnited States, some child restraints also have atop tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease between theseatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover, if there isa cover.

Rear Seat

53

For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B)are located under trim covers in the rear cargoarea, attached to the back wall (A) of the vehicle.Squeeze and pull the front part of the trimcover to access the anchors. Remove the cargoshade before installing the top tether. Thecargo shade should remain off while the top tetheranchor is in use. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

For outside seating positions in a wagon model,the top tether anchors (A) are exposed anchors,located behind the rear seat, on the floor ofthe rear cargo area (B). Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

Hatchback Wagon Outside Positions

54

For the center position in wagon model, the toptether anchor (A) is located under a trim cover onthe ceiling (B). Open the trim cover to accessthe anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 50 for additional information.

Wagon Center Position

55

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

56

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

57

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. For hatchback models, remove the

cargo shade before installing the toptether. The cargo shade should remainoff while the top tether anchor is in use.

2.3. Squeeze and pull the front part of thetrim cover, if there is one, to access theanchors. For the center position in awagon model, flip the cover onthe ceiling to access the anchor.

2.4. Raise the head restraint if the desiredseating position has an adjustable headrestraint. See Head Restraints onpage 15.

2.5. Route and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

58

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing dual tether, routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 51.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

59

3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clickswhen you put it into the buckle. This meansyou are using the correct buckle. Also,make sure the release button is positioned soyou would be able to unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

60

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 51.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

61

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 50.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped)when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 76 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 165 for more informationon this including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped), if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag or airbags willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag or airbags are off.

62

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats (With Sliding Storage Tray) on page 9 orManual Seats (Without Sliding Storage Tray)on page 10.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 51.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 51 if your childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has airbags. See PassengerSensing System on page 76. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin a rear seat, even if the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag(if equipped) is off. If your child restraintis forward-facing, move the seat as far backas it will go before securing the child restraintin this seat. See Manual Seats (With SlidingStorage Tray) on page 9 or Manual Seats(Without Sliding Storage Tray) on page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped), theoff symbol in the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit when you turnthe ignition to ON or START. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 165.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

63

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

64

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off symbolon the instrument panel near the clock will belit and stay lit when the key is turned toON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the offsymbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

65

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers heaters or massagers, located between theseat cushion and the child restraint or smalloccupant, can affect how the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling/securingthe child restraint or small occupant.

If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

Your vehicle may have the following airbags:

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag forthe driver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger.

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and the right front passenger,the words AIR BAG will appear on the airbagcovering on the side of the seatback closest tothe door.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

66

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver andpassenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe crashes wheresomething hits the side of your vehicle.They are not designed to inflate in frontal,in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

67

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Front occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 38 or Infants and Young Children onpage 41.

68

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 164 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

69

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impactairbag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closestto the door.

If your vehicle has one, the passenger’s sideimpact airbag is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

70

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Do not let seatcovers block the inflation path of a sideimpact airbag.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel is about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range.

71

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 66.Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed “threshold level.”The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown in frontal and near-frontal impacts.For side impact airbags, inflation is determinedby the location and severity of the impact.

72

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules.Frontal airbag modules are located insidethe steering wheel and instrument panel.For seating positions with side impact airbags,there are also airbag modules in the side ofthe seatbacks closest to the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

73

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, and forseating positions with side impact airbags, the sideof the seatback closest to the door — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for thosefeatures.

74

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After they inflate, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another crash. A newsystem will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual foryour vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 400.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

75

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when youturn your ignition key to ON or START.

The airbag off symbolwill be visible near theclock, located in thecenter of the instrumentpanel, during thesystem check.

When the system check is complete, the airbag offsymbol will be visible under certain conditions.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 165. The passenger sensing system will turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags arenot part of the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with asensor that is part of the right front passenger’sseat cushion. The sensor is designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear, rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on the sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

76

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, no



system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

77

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),the off symbol near the clock will light and staylit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are off.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 165.

If a child restraint has been installed and the offsymbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 62.

78

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properly in the rightfront passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag or airbagsto be enabled, the off symbol will not light.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideairbag (if equipped), depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build. Everyone inyour vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

79

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off symbol is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens do one of thefollowing:

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seatback in the fully uprightposition, then sit upright in the seat, centeredon the seat cushion, with the person’s legscomfortably extended. Restart the vehicle andhave the person remain in this position forabout three minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag or airbags.

• Take the right front passenger’s weight off ofthe seat for more than three seconds, place theseatback in the fully upright position, and thensit upright in the seat, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Have the person remain in thisposition for about three minutes. This will allowthe system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag or airbags.

80

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of thefrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).See Airbag Readiness Light on page 164for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint or small occupant. You may wantto consider not using seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment if your vehicle has thepassenger sensing system. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 83 formore information about modifications that canaffect how the system operates.

81

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 406.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

82

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 388.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,the instrument panel, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system.If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 388.

83

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 339.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering on a seatback(if equipped), the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag module inthe steering wheel, both the airbag module andthe instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, or both the airbagmodule and the seatback for seating positionswith a side impact airbag (if equipped). Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

84

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part about the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

85

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt pretensioners and safety belt. Be sureto do so. Then the new pretensioner and safetybelt will be there to help protect you in a collision.

If your vehicle has side airbags, the front seatassembly must be replaced after the side airbaghas been deployed.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand right front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags havenot deployed. The driver and right frontpassenger’s safety belt retractor assembliescontain the safety belt pretensioners. Have yoursafety belt pretensioners checked if yourvehicle has been in a collision, or if your airbagreadiness light stays on after you start your vehicleor while you are driving. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 164.

86

Keys .............................................................. 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 91Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 92Doors and Locks .......................................... 95

Door Locks ................................................. 95Central Door Unlocking System ................... 96Power Door Locks ....................................... 96Door Ajar Reminder .................................... 97Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 97Lockout Protection ....................................... 98Liftgate ........................................................ 99

Windows ...................................................... 100Manual Windows ....................................... 100Power Windows ........................................ 101Sun Visors ................................................ 102

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 103Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 103

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 105New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 105Ignition Positions ....................................... 106Starting the Engine .................................... 107Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 109Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 110Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 114Parking Brake ........................................... 116Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 117Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 118Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transaxle) ................................ 119Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 120Engine Exhaust ......................................... 121Running the Engine While Parked ............. 122

Section 2 Features and Controls

87

Mirrors ......................................................... 123Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 123Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 123Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 124Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 125Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 125

Storage Areas ............................................. 126Glove Box ................................................. 126Cupholder(s) .............................................. 126Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............. 127

Front Storage Area .................................... 127Front Armrest Storage Area ....................... 128Roof Rack (Wagon Only) .......................... 128Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 129Convenience Net ....................................... 129Cargo Shade (Wagon Only) ...................... 130Hideaway Rear Storage Bins

(Wagon Only) ........................................ 130Sunroof ....................................................... 131

Section 2 Features and Controls

88

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

89

One key is used for theignition, the doors andall other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerremoves the key tag and gives it to the first owner.The tag has a code on it that tells your dealerhow to make extra keys. For vehicle security, keepthe key tag in a safe place and also record thekey number somewhere other than inside ofthe vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be ableto have a new one made easily using the tag.

If you need a new key, contact your dealer whocan obtain the correct key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 394 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

90

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 92.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

91

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system.

The LED light (A), on the transmitter, will flashwhen the buttons on the remote keyless entrytransmitter are pressed. You can lock and unlockthe vehicle’s doors from about 20 feet (6 m)away. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Systemon page 91 for additional information.

W (Unlock): Press this button to unlock all of thedoors and the liftgate, if equipped. If all of thedoors and the liftgate are closed, the hazard lampswill flash twice to indicate that unlocking hasoccurred. The theft-deterrent system will deactivateand the security light will turn off. The securitylight is located on the base of the driver’sdoor lock.

If a door is not opened or if the engine is notstarted within 30 seconds after pressing unlock onthe remote keyless entry transmitter, all of thedoors will automatically lock and the theft-deterrentsystem will reactivate.

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock all of thedoors and the liftgate, if equipped. If all ofthe doors and the liftgate are closed, the hazardlamps will flash once and the horn will chirpto indicate that locking has occurred. Thetheft-deterrent system will activate and the securitylight will flash.

If the driver’s door is open while pressing lock, allof the doors, except for the driver’s door willlock. If any door other than the driver’s door isopen while pressing lock, all of the doors, includingthe driver’s door, will lock.

92

S (Panic): If your vehicle has this feature, pressthis button to turn on the hazard warningflashers. The hazard warning lamps will flash forabout 28 seconds. Press this button again toturn off the hazard warning lamps.

The lock, unlock, and panic buttons, on theremote keyless entry transmitter, will not operatewhile the key is in the ignition. The theft-deterrentsystem will not activate while the key is in theignition.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your VehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlockingyour vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourdealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the remotekeyless entry transmitter should last abouttwo years.

The battery is weak if the LED light fails toilluminate or if the transmitter will not work at thenormal operating range. If you have to getclose to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

93

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter, do the following:

1. Remove the screw from the back of the coverand open the cover of the transmitter.

2. Pull the transmitter unit out of the cover andopen the cover of the transmitter unit.

3. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive side of thebattery faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1616,or equivalent type battery.

4. Close the cover of the transmitter unit and putthe unit in the cover of the transmitter.

5. Assemble the transmitter cover and replacethe screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

6. Test the transmitter operation.

94

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.



• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the optionalRemote Keyless Entry transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 92.

To manually lock and unlock the doors from theoutside, insert the key into the lock and turnit toward the front or rear of the vehicle.

95

All doors, except for thedriver’s door, can belocked from the outsideby pushing down themanual door lock andthen closing the door.

The driver’s door lock cannot be manually lockedwhile the door is open. Upon leaving thevehicle, the driver’s door can only be locked fromthe outside by using the key or the optionalRKE transmitter.

If your vehicle has a driver’s door security light, it islocated on the base of the lock. The light turns offwhen you unlock the door using the key or the RKEtransmitter. The light turns on when the door islocked using the key or the RKE transmitter.

From the inside, lock and unlock all of the doorsby pushing or pulling the manual door lock.The doors can also be locked and unlocked withthe optional power door lock switches locatedon the driver’s door.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle may have a central door unlockingsystem that is activated from the driver’s door.

From the outside, you can lock or unlock all of thedoors on your vehicle from the driver’s door byusing either the key or the optional RemoteKeyless Entry transmitter. From the inside, youcan lock or unlock all of the doors using thedriver’s door lock.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with powerdoor locks, the doorscan be locked orunlocked using thedriver’s door lock switch.

Press the switch to lock and unlock the doors.

96

Door Ajar Reminder

If one of the doors on isnot closed properlywhile the ignition is on,the door ajar lighton the instrument panelcluster comes onand stays on until thedoors are closed.

See Door Ajar Light on page 177 for additionalinformation.

Rear Door Security Locks

Your vehicle has reardoor security lockson each rear door thatprevent passengersfrom opening therear doors fromthe inside.

97

Using the Rear Door Security Lock1. Move the lever up to lock.2. Close the door.3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.

Notice: Pulling the inside door handle whilethe rear door security locks are engaged coulddamage your vehicle. Do not pull the insidedoor handle while the rear door security locksare engaged.The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside while this feature is in use.

Opening a Rear Door When theSecurity Lock is On1. Unlock the door from the inside.

2. Open the door from the outside.

If you do not cancel the security lock, adults orolder children who ride in the rear will not be ableto open the rear door from the inside. Youshould let adults and older children know how tocancel the locks.

Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock1. Unlock the door from the inside and open

the door from the outside.

2. Move the lever down to unlock.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

The rear door locks can now be locked andunlocked normally.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps prevent locking the key in thecar. The driver’s door can only be locked withthe door closed. From the outside of the vehicle,close the driver’s door and lock it using the keyor the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will neverbe locked out of your vehicle. Always rememberto take your key with you.

98

Liftgate

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the seal between thebody and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 155.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 121.

The liftgate on a hatchback or wagon can belocked and unlocked from outside of the vehicleby inserting the key into the lock and turning it.The Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, if thevehicle has one, can also be used. Then pull upthe handle above the license plate to openthe liftgate.

When closing the liftgate, close it from the centerto make sure it fully latches.

99

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open and close eachwindow.

The rear windows do not open fully.

100

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehicle withchildren.



When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the powerwindow switches arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

In addition, each passenger door has a switch forits own window. The ignition must be turned toON to use the power windows. To lower a window,press the switch. To raise a window, lift up onthe switch.

Uplevel shown, Basesimilar

101

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window may also have anexpress-down feature. This switch is labeledAUTO. Press the switch then release it and thedriver’s window goes all the way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press theswitch again. To raise the window, pull up andhold the switch.

Window Lockout

The driver’s powerwindow controls mayalso include a lockoutbutton.

Press the lockout button to stop the front and rearpassengers from using their window switches.The driver can still operate all the windows with thelock on. Press the lockout button again to returnto normal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare you can pull the visors down.They can also be removed from the centermount and moved to the side.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has vanity mirrors located on theback of the sun visors. Pull the sun visor down andlift the cover to expose the vanity mirror.

102

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm whenyou lock the doors using the key or the manualdoor lock. It activates only when you use theoptional remote keyless entry transmitter.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK and remove the keyfrom the ignition.If the key is inserted in the ignition, thetransmitter will not operate the theft-deterrentsystem.

2. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, andthe trunk or liftgate.Make sure the windows are closed, as thesystem can be activated even if the windowsare open.

3. Lock the door using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. The transmitter must be used toactivate the theft-deterrent system.

• The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

• All of the doors will lock.

• The hazard warning lamps will flash onceand the horn will chirp.

• The theft-deterrent mode will activate.

• The security light will flash once everysecond to indicate that the theft-deterrentsystem is armed. The security light is locatedon the base of the driver’s door lock.

103

To avoid activating the alarm by accident, useone of the following methods:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s door usingthe key.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Unlocking a door any other way will activate thealarm when a door, the trunk or liftgate is opened.

If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrentsystem, lock the vehicle using the key or themanual door locks.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, use one of the followingmethods:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s door usingthe key.

• Press the unlock button on the transmitter.

− The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

− All of the doors will unlock.− The hazard warning lamps will flash

twice.− The theft-deterrent mode will deactivate.

If the door is not opened or if the engine is notstarted within 30 seconds after disarming thesystem with the transmitter, all of the doors willautomatically lock and the theft-deterrent modewill reactivate.

104

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened withoutusing the key or the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps willflash for up to 30 seconds.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmIf the system alarm is active, it can be deactivatedusing one of the following methods:

• Press the lock or unlock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front doorusing the key.

Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after30 seconds. The system will then lock thedoors and reactivate the theft-deterrent system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf the hazard warning lamps flash once when youpress the lock or unlock buttons on the remotekeyless entry transmitter, that means thetheft-deterrent system alarm was triggered whileyou were away, from the vehicle.

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new linings canmean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

105

Ignition Positions

The ignition switchcan be turned tofour differentpositions withthe key.

{CAUTION:

On manual transaxle vehicles, turning thekey to LOCK and removing it will lock thesteering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only to ACC. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

106

LOCK: This position locks the steering wheel,ignition, shift lever and transaxle. This is the onlyposition in which you can insert or remove thekey. If the steering wheel is locked, move it fromright to left and turn the key to ACC (Accessory).

ACC (Accessory): This position operatessome of the electrical accessories, such as theradio, but not the climate control system.

ON: This is the position the switch returns after youstart the engine and release the key. The switchstays in ON when the engine is running. But evenwhen the engine is not running, you can use ON tooperate the electrical accessories, and to displaysome instrument panel warning lights.

START: This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key. The switchreturns to ON for normal driving. Do not turnthe key to START if the engine is running.

Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ONallow you to operate electrical accessories,such as the radio.

Starting the Engine

Automatic TransaxleMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine does not start in any otherposition — that is a safety feature. To restartwhen the vehicle is already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Manual TransaxleThe gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and theparking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedalto the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle willnot start if the clutch pedal is not all the waydown — that is a safety feature.

107

Starting Your Engine1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.Wait about 15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining your battery or damagingyour starter.

2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds andtry again to start the engine by turning theignition key to START. Wait about 15 secondsbetween each try.After the engine has run about 10 seconds towarm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven.Do not “race” your engine when it is cold.If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),let the engine run for a few minutes towarm up.

3. If the engine still does not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedalall the way to the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START for aboutthree seconds. If the vehicle starts brieflybut then stops again, do the same thing, butthis time keep the pedal down for five orsix seconds. This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

108

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater isnot required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driverside of the engine compartment, behind thebattery.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

109

Automatic Transaxle Operation

If your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle, theshift lever is locatedon the console betweenthe seats.

Your vehicle may also have an electronic shiftposition indicator that displays the position of theshift lever. This indicator is located to the rightof the trip odometer on the instrument panelcluster.

Movement between certain positions requirespushing the shift lever to the passenger side whileshifting. This prevents you from changingpositions unexpectedly by blocking the straightmovement of the shift lever while the vehicleis moving.

PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.It is the best position to use when the startyour engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 117.

110

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Theregular brakes must be applied before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holdingthe brake pedal down, see Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 118.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) toREVERSE (R), you must press down on theshift lever while shifting.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging the transaxle,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow on page 235.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whileyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

111

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position isfor normal driving.

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice thatit is moving slowly or not shifting gears asyou increase speed may damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving, however, it offers more power and lowerfuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):• When driving on hilly, winding roads.• When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more powerbut lower fuel economy. Use SECOND (2) onhills. It can help control the vehicles speed as yougo down steep mountain roads, but then youwould also want to use your brakes off and on.

Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speedsover 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damagethe transaxle. Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D) as much as possible. Do notshift into SECOND (2) unless you are goingslower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you candamage your engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even morepower but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2).Use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow ormud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1),the transaxle does not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use the brakes, orparking brake to hold the vehicle in place.

If there is a malfunction with the automatictransaxle, the Check Engine Light or the HOLDindicator light will turn on or flash. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 172 or Hold Mode Lighton page 170.

Take your vehicle to your dealer as soon aspossible.

112

Hold ModeIf your vehicle’s transaxle has a hold mode, selectthis mode to drive with some characteristics of amanual transaxle. With hold mode turned on, theautomatic transaxle stays in a specific gear range.

Press the HOLD buttonon the shift lever consoleto turn on hold mode.

Press the button again to turn off hold mode, andreturn to normal automatic transaxle operation.

While on, the HOLD indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster will light up. See HoldMode Light on page 170.

When hold mode is activated, the transaxleoperates in the following ways:

• When the transaxle is in AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D), the transaxle operates in agear range of SECOND (2) to THIRD (3)to AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) and tries tomaintain AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)for as long as possible.

• When the transaxle is in THIRD (3), thetransaxle operates in a gear range ofSECOND (2) to THIRD (3) and tries tomaintain THIRD (3) for as long as possible.

• When the transaxle is in SECOND (2),the transaxle is fixed in that gear.

• When the transaxle is in FIRST (1), thetransaxle is fixed in that gear.

113

Hold Mode FunctionsWinter FunctionSelect hold mode while in AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D), THIRD (3) or SECOND (2) tohelp the vehicle maintain traction on slippery roadsurfaces, such as snow, mud, or ice.

Manually Controlling ShiftSelect hold mode to use your automatic transaxlelike a four-speed manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Operation

Five-Speed

This is the shift patternfor a Five-Speedtransaxle.

Here is how to operate a manual transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

Shift into FIRST (1) while you are going less than20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to NEUTRAL.

114

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle the engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever andshift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

115

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thebucket seats.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 168.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

116

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushingthe lever toward the passenger side of thevehicle and then up.

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P). If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

117

Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, theweight of the vehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transaxle. You mayfind it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 117.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)An automatic transaxle vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system which locksthe shift lever in PARK (P) when the ignition is inLOCK. You have to fully apply your regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe ignition is turned to ON. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 110.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holdingthe brake pedal down, try this:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.

3. Pry off the cover over the shift-lock releaseslot using a small, flat object. The shift-lockrelease slot is located at the top of theshift lever.

118

4. Insert the key intothe shift-lock releaseslot and pressand hold the key.

5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

6. Remove the key from the shift-lock releaseslot, insert the key into the ignition and startthe engine.

7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.

8. Apply and hold the regular brake fullyand release the parking brake.

9. Shift to the gear you want.

10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transaxle)Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly applythe parking brake.

2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and placethe shift lever into the gear position asstated below:

• When parking on level ground, place theshift lever into NEUTRAL.

• When parking downhill, place the shift leverin REVERSE (R).

• When parking uphill, place the shift lever inFIRST (1).

3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK,remove the key and release the clutch.

119

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

120

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

121

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 121.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 231.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transaxle shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transaxle shiftlever to PARK (P), or the manual transaxleshift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. If you have an automatic transaxle,see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 117.

122

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhen you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center tomove it up or down and side to side. The day/nightadjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoidglare from any headlamps behind you. Push or pullthe tab for daytime/night use.

Outside Manual MirrorsThe outside rearview mirrors should be adjustedso you can see the side of your vehicle when youare sitting in a comfortable driving position.

Adjust the outside mirrors with the control leverson the driver and passenger doors.

The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flatagainst the side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle.

123

Outside Power Mirrors

Your vehicle may have outside power mirrors.The control for the power mirrors is located onthe driver’s side door trim.

Move the outside power mirror control to L whileadjusting the left mirror and to R while adjustingthe right mirror. Place the control in the centerposition when not adjusting either mirror. To adjusta mirror, press the the four-way control pad tomove the mirror in the desired direction. Theignition must be turned to ON to adjust the mirrors.

The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flatagainst the side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle.

124

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things(like other vehicles) look farther awaythan they really are. If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane, you could hit a vehicleon your right. Check your inside mirroror glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things,like other vehicles, look farther away than theyreally are.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, when you operatethe rear window defogger, the heated driver’sand passenger’s outside power mirrors arewarmed to help clear them of ice and snow.See “Rear Window and Outside Mirror Defogger”under Climate Control System on page 155 formore information.

125

Storage Areas

Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each frontseatback for your convenience.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling up on the bottom ofthe handle.

Cupholder(s)The cupholders are located in the center consoleand in the rear seat center armrest. To usethe front cupholders, move the inner supportforward or backward. If your vehicle hasrear cupholders, push down on the rear seatcenter armrest to use them.

126

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

The sunglasses storage compartment is locatedabove the driver’s door. To open it, pull down andhold the upper part of the cover. To close thecompartment, let go of the cover and thecompartment will automatically close.

Front Storage Area

Your vehicle may have a sliding storage traylocated under the front passenger seat. To usethe tray, pull up on the end of the tray and pull ittoward the instrument panel. Push the traytoward the seat to return it to its original position.

127

Front Armrest Storage AreaYour vehicle has a front armrest storage area.To open the storage area, pull up on the lift leverand raise the lid. To close the storage area,lower the lid and push it down until it latchessecurely.

Roof Rack (Wagon Only)

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe roof rack — like paneling, plywood,a mattress and so forth — the wind cancatch it as you drive along.



This can cause you to lose control. Whatyou are carrying could be violently tornoff, and this could cause you or otherdrivers to have a collision, and of coursedamage your vehicle. You may be able tocarry something like this inside. But,never carry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of your vehicle.

The roof rack with side rails lets you to load thingson top of your vehicle. Do not put things on topof your vehicle that are wider or longer thanthe roof rack.

128

Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack thatweighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangsover the rear or sides of the vehicle maydamage your vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests on the slats as far forward as possibleand against the side rails, making sure tofasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 236.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check now and then to make sure cargo isstill securely fastened.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may have a rear seat armrest thatcontains two cupholders. To access thecupholders, pull the armrest down from the rearseatback.

Convenience NetThe convenience net can help keep small loadsfrom moving during sharp turns or quick starts andstops.

Hang the four net hooks in the metal rings oneach corner of the floor.

129

Cargo Shade (Wagon Only)

Your vehicle has a cargo shade. Pull the handle ofthe shade toward the rear of the vehicle andinsert the retainer into the slot located on bothsides of the tailgate openings. To removethe shade, release the handle after pulling ittoward you a little. The shade will retractautomatically.

Do not place items on top of the cargo shade.

Hideaway Rear Storage Bins(Wagon Only)

There are various bins under the luggagecompartment floor. To access the bins, pull up onthe floor mat handle.

130

SunroofIf the vehicle has this feature, the switch is locatedbetween the map lamp buttons. The sunroof willonly operate when the ignition is turned to ON.The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or itcan be express-opened all of the way.

The sunroof must be manually opened or closed.

To open the sunroof to the vent position, push thefront part of the switch. To return the sunroof toits original position, push the rear part of the switchand hold it until the sunroof reaches the desiredposition.

To fully open the sunroof, push the rear part of theswitch. The sunroof will open automatically untilthe front or the rear part of the switch is pushedagain. To close the sunroof, push the front part ofthe switch and hold it until the sunroof is closed.The sunroof will stop if the switch is releasedduring operation.

In both the vent and fully open positions, the airflow can be adjusted for driving comfort by pushingand holding the switch until the sunroof movesto the desired position.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

131

✍ NOTES

132

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 136Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 140Other Warning Devices ............................. 140Horn .......................................................... 140Tilt Wheel .................................................. 141Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 141Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 142Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 142Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 143Windshield Wipers ..................................... 143Windshield Washer .................................... 144Rear Window Wiper/Washer

(Hatchback and Wagon Only) ................ 145Cruise Control ........................................... 145Exterior Lamps .......................................... 148Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 149Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 149Fog Lamps ................................................ 150Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 150Dome Lamp .............................................. 151Map Lamps ............................................... 151Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ............... 152

Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 152Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 153Clock ......................................................... 154

Climate Controls ......................................... 155Climate Control System ............................. 155Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 159Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 159

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 161Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 161Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 163Trip Odometer ........................................... 163Tachometer ............................................... 163Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 164Safety Belt Reminder Tone ....................... 164Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 164Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 165Charging System Light .............................. 167Brake System Warning Light ..................... 168Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ........ 169Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)

Warning Light ......................................... 170

Section 3 Instrument Panel

133

Hold Mode Light ........................................ 170Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 171Tire Pressure Light .................................... 171Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 172Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 175Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 176Cruise Control Light .................................. 176Highbeam On Light ................................... 176Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ........................................ 176Door Ajar Light .......................................... 177Trunk Ajar Light (Hatchback Only) ............. 177Fuel Gage ................................................. 177Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 178

Audio System(s) ......................................... 178Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) ....................... 180Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA) ......... 186Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) ...... 194Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc

Player) ................................................... 198Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 202Radio Reception ........................................ 203Care of Your CDs ..................................... 203Care of the CD Player .............................. 204Integrated Windshield Antenna .................. 204

Section 3 Instrument Panel

134

✍ NOTES

135

Instrument Panel Overview

136

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 159.

B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 161.

C. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 140.

D. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 154.E. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 178.F. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 150.G. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 257.H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on

page 148.

I. Horn. See Horn on page 140.J. Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on

page 145.K. Windshield Wiper Control. See Windshield

Wipers on page 143.L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 155.M. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

on page 153.N. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 153.O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 126.

137

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 159.

B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 161.

C. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 140.

D. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 154.E. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 178.F. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 150.G. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 257.H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on

page 148.

I. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 202.

J. Horn. See Horn on page 140.K. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on

page 145.L. Windshield Wiper Control. See Windshield

Wipers on page 143.M. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 155.N. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

on page 153.O. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 153.P. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 126.

139

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem.The front and rear turn signal lamps will flashon and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can setthem up at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

140

Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel which lets you adjustthe steering wheel before you drive.

The lever that lets you tilt the steering wheel islocated under the steering column.

To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and pushthe lever away from you. Then, move the wheelto a comfortable position and pull the lever towardyou to lock the wheel in place.

Raise it to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and

Lane-Change Signals on page 142.• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 142.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 143.

• Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 148.

• Fog Lamps, if equipped. See Fog Lamps onpage 150.

Uplevel shown, Base similar

141

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionslet you signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever returnsby itself when it is released.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all, a signalbulb could be burned out and other drivers willnot see your turn signal.

Replace the bulb to help avoid an accident. If thearrow still does not flash when signaling, check thefuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 346.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, a light on theinstrument panel clusteralso is on if theignition is turned to ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

142

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever located on the right side of thesteering wheel to operate the windshield wipers.The ignition must be turned to ON to operatethe windshield wipers.

HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor wiping at high speed.

LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor steady wiping at low speed.

INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this positionto choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn theband on the windshield wiper lever toward FASTor SLOW for a shorter or longer delay betweenwipes. The wiper speed can only be adjusted whenthe lever is in the INT position.

OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off thewindshield wipers.

143

Misting FunctionMove the lever toward, but not completely in, theINT position for a single wiping cycle. Hold itthere until the windshield wipers start; then let go.The windshield wipers stop after one wipe. Ifadditional wiping cycles are needed, hold the levertoward INT longer.Remember that damaged wiper blades canprevent you from seeing well enough to drivesafely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice andsnow from the wiper blades before using them.If they are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomedamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield WasherTo wash the windshield, pull the windshieldwiper/washer lever toward you while the ignitionturned to ON.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the lever, the washers stop, butthe wipers continue to wipe for about two orthree cycles and either stop or resume at theprevious speed.

144

Rear Window Wiper/Washer(Hatchback and Wagon only)

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Your vehicle has a rear window washer/wiper.Operate the rear window washer/ wiper systemby pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever awayfrom you.

The wiper operates continuously when the lever isin the first position. In some vehicle models, thewiper operates intermittently.

Washer fluid sprays onto the rear window and thewiper operates continuously when the lever ispushed to the second position.

Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintaina speed of about 24 mph (39 km/h) or morewithout keeping your foot on the accelerator.This can really help on long trips. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

145

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlpad is located onthe right side of thesteering wheel.

1. Press the ON/OFF button to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Accelerate to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET button and release it.An indicator light on the instrument panelcluster will come on to show that the cruisecontrol is on. See Cruise Control Lighton page 176.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set to a desired speed andthen turned off by applying the brake or clutchpedal, if you have a manual transaxle, this shutsoff the cruise control. However, it does not need tobe reset. Once you are going about 24 mph(39 km/h) or more, you can briefly press theRESUME button.

The vehicle will go back to your chosen speedand stay there.

If the RESUME button is held, the vehicle willkeep going faster until the button is released oryou apply the brake pedal. Do not hold theRESUME button, if you do not want the vehiclespeed to keep increasing.

146

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higherspeed. Press the SET button, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal. You willnow cruise at the higher speed.

• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there untilyour desired speed is reached, and thenrelease the button. To increase your speedin very small amounts, briefly press theRESUME button and then release it.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

The accelerate feature will only work after thecruise control is turned on by pressing theSET button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the SET button until you reach thelower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the SET button. Each time you dothis, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed set earlier.

147

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you mayhave to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Applying the brake pedal will turnoff the cruise control. Many drivers find this to betoo much trouble and do not use cruise controlon steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or pressthe clutch pedal, if you have a manualtransaxle.

• Press the ON/OFF button on the cruisecontrol pad.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory can beerased by turning off the cruise control orthe ignition.

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.The exterior lamp band has three positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turn the band to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thefollowing:• Taillamps• License Plate Lamp• Instrument Panel Lights

The headlamps will turn off automatically when theignition switch is turned to LOCK or ACC.


148

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the band to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps, togetherinstrument panel lights, taillamps, and licenseplate lamp.

OFF: Turn the band to this position to turnall lamps off except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignitionturned to LOCK or ACC while leaving the lampson, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your low-beamheadlamps come on in daylight when the followingconditions are met:• The ignition is on.• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the

parking lamp position.• The parking brake is released.

An indicator light will come on when the DRL areon. See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light on page 176.When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights will not be illuminated unless youhave turned the exterior lamps control tothe parking lamp or headlamp position.The DRL system will turn off when one of thefollowing conditions are met:• The ignition is off.• The parking brakes are on.• The high-beam headlamps are on.• The low-beam headlamps are on.• The flash-to-pass feature is used.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

149

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for bettervisibility in foggy or misty conditions.

The band for the front fog lamps is located in themiddle of the turn signal/multifunction lever.While using the fog lamps, the ignition must be onas well as the parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps.

Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light will come on while the fog lampsare on. See Fog Lamp Light on page 176.

Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off.

The fog lamps will also turn off while thehigh-beam headlamps are turned on. When thehigh-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lampswill turn on again.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The thumbwheel forthis feature is locatedon the instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the instrumentpanel lights or down to dim them.

150

Dome Lamp

The switch on this lamphas three positions.

ON: The light comes on and stays on regardlessof whether a door is opened or closed.

O (Door): The light comes on while a door isopened. After all of the doors are closed, the lightstays on for about seven seconds, and thenfades out. The light will also turn off when theignition is turned to ON.

OFF: The light remains off even when a door isopened.

Map Lamps

Your vehicle may have map lamps. To turn a lampon, press the button next to it. Press the buttonagain to turn it off.


151

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’sbattery against drainage from the taillamps, licenseplate lamps, instrument panel lights, and parkinglamps. When the ignition is turned off, the power tothese features will automatically turn off after5 seconds once the driver’s door is closed.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

One accessory power outlet is located on the frontof the center console below the front ashtray. Forwagon models, there may be another outlet in therear luggage compartment on the driver’s side.

To use the outlet, remove the protective cap.When not in use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap. The accessory power outlet isoperational when the ignition is turned to ACCor ON.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery.Always turn off electrical equipment when notin use and do not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on the accessorypower outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

152

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe front ashtray is located at the lower part ofthe center of the instrument panel. To remove thebin from the front ashtray for cleaning, openthe ashtray fully, lift up the inner bin and then pullthe bin out.

The rear ashtray is located at the bottom of therear center console. Pull the ashtray towardthe rear of the vehicle to open it. To remove therear ashtray, press in the retaining spring and pullthe bin out.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

The cigarette lighter is located to the right of thefront ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC orON, push the cigarette lighter in all the way andlet go. When it is ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

153

ClockYour vehicle has a digital clock. If you have thewagon, the clock is located in the center of theinstrument panel below the air outlets. If you have ahatchback, the clock is located in the center of theinstrument panel above the air outlets. When theignition is turned to ACC or ON, the time isdisplayed in the digital clock. There arethree adjusting buttons for the digital clock:

H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press theH button once. To go forward more than one hour,press and hold the button until the correct houris reached.

M (Minute): To go forward one minute, pressthe M button once. To go forward more thanone minute, press and hold the button until thecorrect minute is reached.

S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour,press the S button.

For example, if this button is pressed while thetime is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to8:00. If this button is pressed while the time isbetween 8:30 and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.

After disconnecting the battery or replacing thefuse, reset the clock.

Hatchback similar

154

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fanwill run continuously with the ignition on. The fanmust be on in order for the air conditioningcompressor to run.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing from the middle knob:

E (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

( (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects the remaining air to the floor outlets.

5 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets. Some of the air will also bedirected to the windshield, instrument panel sideoutlets, and the rear outlets. Be sure to keepthe area under the front seats clear to allow theflow of air to the rear compartment.

The middle knob can also be used to select thedefog and defrost modes. Information on defoggingand defrosting can be found later in this section.

Temperature Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to manuallyincrease or decrease the temperature inside yourvehicle. Turn the knob to the blue area to getcool air and to the red area to get warm air.


155

A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has airconditioning, follow these steps to use the system.Start the engine and set the fan control knob tothe desired fan speed. The air conditioningcompressor does not operate when the fan controlknob is in the OFF position. Press the A/Cbutton to turn the air conditioning system on andoff. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light inthe button will come on to let you know that airconditioning is activated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Press the A/C button.

4. Press the recirculation button.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside airfrom coming into the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors from entering yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly.

Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on.When the button is pressed, an indicator light inthe button will come on. Press this button again toreturn to outside air mode.

Using the recirculation mode for extended periodsmay cause your windows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.

156

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity or moisture condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.Select one of these available modes from theright knob.

É (Defog): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the floor outlets. A smallamount of air is also directed to the outboardoutlets for the side windows and to the instrumentpanel side outlets.

When you select this mode, the system runs theair-conditioning compressor. To defog the windowsfaster, turn the temperature control knobclockwise to the warmest setting.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the outboard outlets for theside windows. A small amount of air is alsodirected to the instrument panel side outlets.

When you select this mode, the system runs theair-conditioning compressor. To defrost thewindows faster, turn the temperature control knobclockwise to the warmest setting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

157

Front Heated WindshieldYour vehicle may have a heated front windshieldwhich can be used with defog and defrost.This feature will only work when the ignition isturned to ON.

The front heated windshield uses a heatedelement to remove fog or frost from the bottom ofthe windshield.

< (Rear): Press this button to heat the frontwindshield. The button is located below the audiosystem. An indicator light in the button willcome on to let you know that the feature isactivated. The front windshield heater will turn offabout ten minutes after the button is pressed.It can also be turned off by pressing the buttonagain or by turning off the engine. See “RearWindow and Outside Mirror Defogger” later in thissection for more information on this button.

Rear Window and Outside MirrorDefoggerYour vehicle may have a rear window and outsidemirror defogger. This feature will only workwhen the ignition is turned to ON.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.Before using this feature, clear as much snowfrom the rear window as possible.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow and outside mirror defogger on or off.An indicator light in the button will come on to letyour know that the rear window defogger isactivated.

158

The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed. Thedefogger can also be turned off by pressing thebutton again or by turning off the engine. See“Front Heated Windshield” earlier in this sectionfor more information on this button.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the lever located in the center of each outletto change the direction of the airflow. Use thethumbwheel located below the outlets to turn themon and off.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterYour vehicle may have a passenger compartmentair filter. It is located on the passenger sideunder the glove box.

The filter traps most of the pollen from air enteringthe module. Like the engine’s air cleaner/filter, itmay need to be changed periodically.

159

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Remove the four screws from the filter coverlocated below the glove box.

2. Remove the filter cover.

3. Remove the old passenger compartmentair filter.

4. Then reverse the steps to install the new airfilter.Make sure that the new filter is inserted to thecorrect air flow.

Wagon shown, Hatchback similar

160

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work together tolet you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to letyou know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You will know how fast you are going, howmuch fuel you are using, and many other thingsyou will need to drive safely and economically.

161

Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained onthe following pages.


162

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your vehicle’sspeed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven in kilometers.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record the number ofkilometers traveled for up to two trips.

You can cycle between the odometer and tripodometers A and B by pressing the reset buttonlocated in the lower right area of the speedometer.By pressing the reset button, you can tell howmany kilometers have been recorded on eitherTrip A or Trip B since you last set the trip odometerback to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero, press andhold the reset button. The reset button resets onlythe trip odometer that is displayed. Each tripodometer must be reset individually.

Tachometer

The tachometerdisplays your enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

163

Safety Belt Reminder Light

The safety belt light willcome on and stay onuntil the driver’ssafety belt is buckled.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light willnot come on.

Safety Belt Reminder ToneIf your vehicle has this feature, a tone will soundfor several seconds when the ignition is turnedto ON to remind people to fasten their safety belts.The tone will not sound if the driver’s safety beltis already buckled.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information onthe airbag system, see Airbag System on page 66.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

164

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly.The airbags in your vehicle may notinflate in a crash, or they could eveninflate without a crash. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the airbagreadiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has a passenger airbag statusindicator in the clock, located in the center of theinstrument panel.

When the ignition key isturned to ON or START,the passenger airbagstatus indicator will lightfor several secondsas a system check.

Then, after several more seconds, if the offsymbol is lit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 76 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

165

If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped) are enabled (mayinflate).

{CAUTION:

If the off symbol in the passenger airbagstatus indicator does not come on whenyou have a rear-facing child restraintinstalled in the right front passenger’s seat,it means that the passenger sensingsystem has not turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags inflate.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag or airbags. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat unless the airbag orairbags have been turned off.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in the rearseat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.

166

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped).See Airbag Readiness Light on page 164for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you itis working.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, youmay have a problem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by your dealer. Drivingwhile this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

167

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should comeon briefly when you turnthe ignition to ON. If itdoes not come on then,have it fixed so it will beready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not fully release. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedalmay go closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 241.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

168

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has anAnti-Lock Brake System(ABS), this light willcome on when theignition is turned toON and may stay onfor several seconds.That is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK.If the light comes on, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off.

Then start the engine again to reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service.See your dealer. If the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes, butyou do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you do nothave anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 168.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to ON. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

169

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) Warning Light

If your vehicle hasSpeed Sensitive PowerSteering, this warninglight will come on brieflywhen you turn theignition to ON as a checkto show you it is working.

Then it should go out after a few seconds.

If the warning light does not come on, have it fixedso it will be able to warn you if there is a problem.

If the warning light stays on, or comes on whileyou are driving, the system may not be working.If this happens, see your dealer for service.

Hold Mode Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, this light willcome on when the holdmode is active.

If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehiclechecked. See “Hold Mode” under AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 110 for additionalinformation on this feature.

170

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Your vehicle has anengine coolanttemperature gage.With the ignition turnedto ON, this gageshows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, yourengine is too hot. It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 271.

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 303 for moreinformation.

This light will flash for about 75 seconds and thenstay on if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 312for more information.

171

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The Check Engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or replacement tires that do notmatch your vehicle’s original tires can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 249.

When the ignition is on, this light should come onand should go out after a few seconds as acheck to show you it is working. If the light doesnot come on, have it repaired.

172

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 254.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

173

Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 251. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theCheck Engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving.If you have done this and your vehicle still doesnot pass the inspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, your dealer can prepare the vehicle forinspection.

174

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when youare driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working. The light will goout when you turn the ignition on. If it doesnot come on with the ignition on, youmay have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

175

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 150 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 145for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever the high-beamheadlamps are on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 142 for more information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light will come onwhen the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)are activated. SeeDaytime RunningLamps (DRL) onpage 149.

176

Door Ajar Light

This light will stay onuntil all doors are closedand completely latched.

If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s dooris open, you will also hear a warning chime.

Trunk Ajar Light (Hatchback Only)

This light will come onwhen the trunk is notcompletely closed.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tellsyou about how muchfuel you have left whenthe ignition is turnedto ON.

When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warninglight will come on. You still have a little fuelleft, but you should get more soon. See Low FuelWarning Light on page 178 for more information.

177

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn offthe ignition.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes onwhen the fuel tank islow on fuel.

The low fuel warning light comes on when there isabout 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of fuel remaining inthe tank.

To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank.See Filling the Tank on page 254.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 206. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

178

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment can interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

179

Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)

Playing the Radio

O(Power/Volume): Press and release this knobto turn the system on or off.

Turn the power/volume knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tomute the system.

Finding a Station

AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.The display shows the selection.

FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.The display shows the selection.

() TUNE: Press this button to select radiostations.

Press the up arrows to increase or the downarrows to decrease the radio frequencies.

¦¥ SEEK: Press this button to seek radiostations.

Press the up arrows to seek the next radio stationor the down arrows to seek the previous radiostation.

SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio scans stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

180

AST (Automatic Store)Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest receptionin the region can be automatically stored. Press theAST button for more than two seconds. The displayshows AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNINGflashes on the display. Once the stations are stored,the radio switches to FM1 and the first presetstation begins to play. FM-A displays while listeningto the automatic stored stations. Press the AM orFM button to cancel automatic store.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, andsix AM2), can be programmed on the six numberedbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1,FM2, AM1 or AM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedbuttons for more than two seconds. Thepreset button number one through six flasheson the display when the station has beenset. Whenever that numbered preset button ispressed, that preset station returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each presetbutton.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function isBASS, TRE, BAL, FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL(Bass, Treble, Fade, Balance, Equalization Off,and Volume).

181

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button untilBAS (bass) displays. Turn the volume knobto increase or to decrease the bass. The displayshows the bass level. After making the selection,press this button to set the bass level selection.

Press this button until TRE (treble) displays.Turn the volume knob to increase or to decreasethe treble. The display shows the treble level.After making the selection, press this button to setthe treble level selection. If a station is weak orhas static, decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL (balance) displays. Turn thevolume knob to increase or to decrease. Thedisplay shows the balance level. After making theselection, press this button to set the balance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD (fade)displays. Turn the volume knob to increase or todecrease the fade between the front and the rearspeakers. The display shows the fade level. Aftermaking the selection, press this button to set thefade level.

Setting the EqualizationThe order for displayed customized equalizationsettings are EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE,ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.

SOUND (Equalization): Press this buttonuntil EQ OFF (equalization) displays to selectcustomized equalization settings designedfor classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice andtechno. Turn the volume knob until the desiredequalization setting displays. After makingthe selection, press the SOUND button to set theequalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF displays, turn thevolume knob until OFF displays, then press theSOUND button again to set the equalization setting.

182

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. Insert a CD with the ignition off.

When a CD is inserted, CDP displays. As the CD isloading, Filecheck displays. As each new trackstarts to play, Track and the track number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When a CD is inthe player and the ignition is turned on, theradio must be turned on before the CD startsplayback. When the ignition and radio are turnedon, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading

and ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 203 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

183

2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat thecurrent track. RPT displays. Press this buttonagain to turn off repeat play.

3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM displays. Press this button again to turn offrandom play.

4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to thefirst few seconds of each track on each loaded CD.INTRO displays. To stop scanning press thisbutton again. The current track begins to play.

() TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press thedown arrows to go to the start of the currenttrack or press the up arrows to go to the next track.The track number displays. The player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CDwith each press of the up or down arrows.

AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. CDP displays when the CDplayer has been selected. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Press this button while a CD is playing to pausethe CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Pressthis button again to start playing the CD.

EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. This isthe only way a CD can be ejected from the player.The CD can eject when the ignition or the radiois turned off.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscIf you have a radio with a single CD (MP3), it iscapable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc.For more information on how to play an MP3/WMACD-R disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.

184

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) onpage 194 or Using an MP3 (Radio withSix-Disc Player) on page 198 later inthis section.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output. Do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.An external audio device such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, orcassette tape player, etc. can be connected to theauxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear a person speakingon a cell phone during conversation through thevehicle sound system.

185

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 206 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. While a device is connected, turn theportable audio player on and press the radioCD/AUX button to hear audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button onceto play a CD while a portable audio device isplaying. Press this button a second time for thesystem to begin playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. Once in this mode,“Auxinput” appears on the display. If the auxiliaryjack does not detect the presence of an outputjack, the auxiliary mode does not display.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additionaladjustments on a portable device might be neededto get the desired volume.

Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA)

Playing the Radio

O(Power/Volume): Press and release this knobto turn the system on or off.

Turn the power/volume knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume.

Press and hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to silence the system. Press andrelease this knob again to turn the sound back on.

186

Finding a Station

AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.The display shows the selection.

FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.The display shows the selection.

() TUNE: Press this button to select radiostations.

Press the up arrows to increase or the downarrows to decrease the radio frequencies.

¦¥ SEEK: Press this button to seek radiostations.

Press the up arrows to seek the next radio stationor the down arrows to seek the previous radiostation.

SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

AST (Automatic Store)Six FM1 preset stations with the strongestreception in the region can be automatically stored.Press the AST button for more than one second.The display shows AUTO SCANNING andthen SCANNING flashes on the display. Once thestations are stored, the radio switches to FM1and the first preset station begins to play. FM-Adisplays while listening to the automatic storedstations. Press the AM or FM button to cancelautomatic store.

187

Setting Preset StationsUp to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A,six AM1, six AM2, and six AM-A), can beprogrammed on the six numbered buttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1,FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, or AM-A.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for more than two seconds.The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6)flashes on the display when the stationhas been set. Whenever that numbered presetbutton is pressed, that preset station returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for eachpreset button.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble,Fade, Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press thisbutton until BAS (bass) displays. Turn thepower/volume knob to increase or to decrease thebass. The display shows the bass level. Aftermaking the selection, press this button to selectthe bass level.

Press this button until MID (midrange) displays.Turn the power/volume knob to increase orto decrease the midrange. The display shows themidrange level. After making the selection,press this button to select the midrange level.

Press this button until TRE (treble) displays.Turn the power/volume knob to increase or todecrease the treble. The display shows the treblelevel. After making the selection, press thisbutton to select the treble level. If a station is weakor has static, decrease the treble.

188

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL (balance) displays. Turn thepower/volume knob to increase or to decrease thebalance. The display shows the balance level.After making the selection, press this buttonto select the balance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD (fade)displays. Turn the power/volume knob to increaseor to decrease the fade between the front andthe rear speakers. The display shows thefade level. After making the selection, press thisbutton to select the fade level.

Setting the EQ (Equalization)

SOUND (Equalization): Press this button untilEQ OFF (equalization) displays to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forclassic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice, and techno.Turn the power/volume knob until the desiredequalization setting displays. After makingthe selection, press the SOUND button to selectthe equalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF displays. Turn thepower/volume knob until OFF displays, then pressthe SOUND button again to select the equalizationsetting.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,TECHNO, and EQ OFF.

189

Playing a CD(s)LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player holds up to six CDs.1. Press and release the load button. A message

to select a slot number from 1 through 6displays.

2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for themessage to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:1. Press and hold the load button for

two seconds. A beep sounds and amessage to load multiple discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the LOAD button again to cancelloading more CDs.

As each CD is inserted, CDP displays. As eachCD is loading, Filecheck displays.

Once playback begins, the track and track numberdisplays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. While a CD is inthe player and the ignition is turned on, theradio must be turned on before the current CDstarts playback. When the ignition and radioare turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 203 for more information.


190




2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat thecurrent track. RPT displays. Press this buttonagain to turn off repeat play.

3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM displays.

Press this button again to turn off random play.

4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to thefirst few seconds of each track on each loaded CD.INTRO displays. To stop scanning press thisbutton again. The current track begins to play.

5 DSC − (Previous CDC): Press this button to goback to the start of the previous CDC.

6 DSC + (Next CDC): Press this button to goforward to the start of the next CDC.


AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. CDP displays when the CDplayer has been selected. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

191

Press this button while a CD is playing to pausethe CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Pressthis button again to start playing the CD.

EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Pressand hold this button to eject all CDs. This isthe only way a CD can be ejected from the player.The CD can eject when the ignition or the radiois turned off.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-Rdisc. For more information on how to play anMP3/WMA disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) onpage 194 or Using an MP3 (Radio withSix-Disc Player) on page 198 later in thissection.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

192

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): The radio system hasan auxiliary input jack located on the lowerright side of the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput. Do not plug the headphone set intothe front auxiliary input jack. An external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™ receiver, etc.can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for useas another source for audio listening.

The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear a person speck on acell phone during a conversation through thevehicle sound system.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 206 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. While a device is connected, turn theportable audio player on and press the radioCD/AUX button to hear audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additionaladjustments on a portable device might be neededto get the desired volume.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button onceto play a CD while a portable audio device isplaying. Press this button a second time for thesystem to begin playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. Once in this mode,“Auxinput” appears on the display. If the auxiliaryjack does not detect the presence of an outputjack, the auxiliary mode does not display.

193

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player)MP3/WMA CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded

on a CD-R disc.• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA

files on one disc.• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or

.wma extension, other file extensions mightnot work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Longfile names and folder names can use more discmemory space than necessary. To conserve spaceon the disc, minimize the length of the file andfolder names. An MP3/WMA CD that was recordedusing no file folders can also be played. Thesystem can support up to eight folders in depth,though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimumin order to keep down the complexity andconfusion in trying to locate a particular folderduring playback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, five sessions, and999 files, the player lets you access and navigateup to the maximum, but all items over themaximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directoryis displayed as ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyother directory.

194

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder function does not function ona CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files,but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. When the radio displays the name ofthe folder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Playback begins from the first track under theroot directory.

• When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, playback continues from files,according to their numerical listing.

• After playing the last track from the last folder,the player begins playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

195

Playing an MP3/WMAWhile the ignition is on, insert a CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,Loading, then Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMAdisplays. The CD should begin playing. A CD playsonly while the ignition is on or ACC (accessory).

As each new track starts to play, the track number,and the song name displays.



If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading

and ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 203 for more information.





196

All of the CD functions work the same whileplaying an MP3/WMA, except for those listed here.See “Playing a CD” earlier for more information.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Pressthe SOUND button for longer than two seconds.The song title or other available informationof a song scrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on.The scroll mode can be changed only whenthe SOUND button is pressed for longer thantwo seconds.

DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat thetracks in the current directory. DIR displays.

Press this button again to repeat the tracks in allof the directories. ALL displays.

Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder)(in MP3/WMA Mode): Press the up or downarrows to change the folder. If CD-R does not haveany folder, “ROOT” flashes on the display for ashort time.


INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press thisbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Song Title, AlbumTitle, and Artist. Bit rate might also display.

When information is not available, No Info(information) displays.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tochange display mode.

197

Using an MP3 (Radio withSix-Disc Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or.wma extension, other file extensions mightnot work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions.It is usually better to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long filenames and folder names might use more discmemory space than necessary. To conserve spaceon the disc, minimize the length of the file and foldernames. An MP3/WMA CD that was recorded usingno file folders can also be played. The system cansupport up to eight folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in order tokeep down the difficulty and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback. If a CDcontains more than the maximum of 50 folders,five sessions, and 999 files, the player lets youaccess and navigate up to the maximum, but allitems over the maximum is ignored.

198

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directoryis displayed as ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyother directory.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder function does not function ona CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files,but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. When the radio displays the name ofthe folder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks is played in the following order:

• Playback begins from the first track under theroot directory.

• When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, playback continues from files,according to their numerical listing.

• After playing the last track from the last folder,the player begins playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

199

Playing an MP3/WMAWhile the ignition is on, insert a CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,Loading, then Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMAdisplays. The CD should begin playing. A CD playsonly while the ignition is on or ACC (accessory).

As each new track starts to play, the track number,and the song name displays.



If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,

and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 203 for more information.





200

All of the CD functions work the same whileplaying an MP3/WMA, except for those listed here.See “Playing a CD” earlier for more information.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Pressthe SOUND button for longer than two seconds.The song title and other available informationof the song scrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on.The scroll mode can be changed only whenthe SOUND button is pressed for longer thantwo seconds.

1 DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat thetracks in the current directory. DIR displays.

Press this button again to repeat the tracks in allof the directories. ALL displays.

Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder)(in MP3/WMA Mode): Press the up or downarrows to change the folder. If CD-R does not haveany folder, “ROOT” flashes on the display for ashort time.


INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press thisbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Song Title, AlbumTitle, and Artist. Bit rate might also display.

When information is not available, No Info(information) displays.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tochange display mode.

201

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the audiosystem on or off.

Press and hold this button for less thantwo seconds to silence the system. Press andrelease this button again to turn the sound back on.

SEEK: Press and release this button within0.5 seconds to go to the next preset station.

Press and hold this button for longer than0.5 seconds to go to the next radio station.The radio seeks stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

When playing a CD, press and release this buttonwithin 0.5 seconds to go to the next track. Pressand hold this button for longer than 0.5 seconds tofast forward through the tracks.

MODE: Press and release this button to selectFM1, FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, AM-A, or CD (MP3).Press and release this button multiple times tocycle through the audio playback options that areavailable on your vehicle.

+ VOLUME −: Press the toggle bar located belowthe + VOLUME − to adjust the volume. Pressthe left side of the toggle bar, below the + (plus)sign to increase the volume. Press the right side ofthe toggle bar, below the − (minus) sign todecrease the volume.

Front View of theSteering Wheel Controls

Side View of the VolumeControl

202

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normalradio reception can occur if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations boost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levels during the night.Static can also occur when things like stormsand power lines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing the treble onyour radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

203

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Integrated Windshield AntennaThe antenna is located in the windshield. It is avery thin metal layer that outlines near the edgesof the windshield. The connector is at the topof the windshield, where the headliner ends. Forproper radio reception, the antenna connectorat the top of the windshield needs to be properlyattached to the post on the glass.

If difficulty with remote transmitters is experienced,such as a garage door opener, try pointing thedevice through the very top of the windshield.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside windshield may damage theantenna. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not clear the inside windshieldwith sharp objects.

Make sure the inside surface of the windshield isnot scratched and that the lines on the glassare not damaged. If the inside surface is damaged,it could interfere with radio reception.

204

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 206Defensive Driving ...................................... 206Drunken Driving ........................................ 207Control of a Vehicle .................................. 210Braking ...................................................... 210Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 211Braking in Emergencies ............................. 213Steering .................................................... 214Off-Road Recovery .................................... 216Passing ..................................................... 217Loss of Control .......................................... 219Driving at Night ......................................... 220Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 222

City Driving ............................................... 225Freeway Driving ........................................ 226Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 227Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 228Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 229Winter Driving ........................................... 231If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 235Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 236Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 236

Towing ........................................................ 241Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 241Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 242Towing a Trailer ........................................ 243

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

205

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

206

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. stateto drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

207

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts.For example, if the same person drank threedouble martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would beclose to 0.12 percent. A person who consumesfood just before or during drinking will havea somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

208

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer.What if there is an emergency, a need to takesudden action, as when a child darts into thestreet? A person with even a moderate BACmight not be able to react quickly enough to avoidthe collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

209

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehiclego where you want it to go. They are the brakes,the steering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where thetires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 249.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 168.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

210

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

211

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

212

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.

Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding,ease off the brake pedal. This will help youretain steering control. If you do have ABS, it isdifferent. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 211.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

213

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)If your vehicle has this optional steering system,the steering system continuously adjusts the effortyou feel when steering at all vehicle speeds.It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solidfeel at highway speeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels.

If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you have evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control.

214

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock yourwheels.

See Braking on page 210. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

215

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

216

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

217

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane changesignal before moving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough ahead ofthe passed vehicle to see its front inyour vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back intothe right lane. Remember that your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

218

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

219

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the brakingskid. If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to get thewheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

220

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

221

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,or turn as well because your tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires do not have much tread left,you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

222

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, tryto slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

223

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drive throughthem very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 303.

224

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 226.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

225

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

226

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before startingout. Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

227

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with

a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

228

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

229

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gearpossible.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

230

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 303.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

231

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently,too. If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 211. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS ornot, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS,if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

232

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

233

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

234

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 236.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 323.

235

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) andREVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 241.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called theMaximum Load weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry; the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certificationlabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

236

Tire and Loading Information Label A vehicle specific tire and loading information labelshows the seating capacity and the maximumload your vehicle can properly carry. This labelalso contains your vehicle’s original equipment tiresize and the recommended tire inflation pressure.For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 303 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 311. The tire and loading information labelis attached inside the glove box of the five doorhatchback model. The tire and loading informationlabel for the wagon is attached to the vehicle’scenter pillar, below the driver’s door latch.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Label Example – 5 Door Hatchback

Label Example – Wagon

237

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount

printed on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from the maximum loadamount, shown in pounds and kilograms.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “maximum load” amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Maximum Loadfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

238




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum load weight and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’smaximum load weight.

Example 2 Example 3

239

Certification Label

A vehicle specific certification label is attached tothe center pillar, near the driver’s door latch.This label tells you the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

Label Example

240

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 394.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such asbehind a motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

241

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle, such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 227.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” that follows for more information.

242

Dolly Towing

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground couldcause transaxle damage. Do not tow thevehicle from the rear with the front wheelson the road.

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC.

3. Put the vehicle in NEUTRAL (N).

4. Set the parking brake and then removethe key.

5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing a TrailerDo not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicleis not designed or intended for such a use. Towinga trailer can adversely affect handling, durabilityand fuel economy.

243

✍ NOTES

244

Service ........................................................ 248Accessories and Modifications ................... 249California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 249Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 250Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 251Fuel ............................................................. 251

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 251Gasoline Specifications .............................. 251California Fuel ........................................... 252Additives ................................................... 252Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 253Filling the Tank ......................................... 254Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 256

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 256Hood Release ........................................... 257Engine Compartment Overview .................. 258Engine Oil ................................................. 260Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 264Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 266

Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 266Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 266Engine Coolant .......................................... 268Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 271Engine Overheating ................................... 271Cooling System ......................................... 273Power Steering Fluid ................................. 279Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 280Brakes ...................................................... 281Battery ...................................................... 284Jump Starting ............................................ 285

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 290Bulb Replacement ....................................... 290

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 290Headlamps ................................................ 290Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps .......... 292Turn Signal Lamps (Side) .......................... 293Sidemarker Lamps (Front) ......................... 294Sidemarker Lamps (Rear) .......................... 295

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

245

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)(Hatchback) ............................................ 296

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)(Wagon) ................................................. 297

Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps(Hatchback) ............................................ 298

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps (Wagon) ........................ 299

Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps(Hatchback) ............................................ 300

License Plate Lamp ................................... 301Replacement Bulbs ................................... 301

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 302Tires ............................................................ 303

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 304Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 307Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 311Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 312Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 316When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 317

Buying New Tires ...................................... 318Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 319Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 320Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 321Wheel Replacement .................................. 322Tire Chains ............................................... 323If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 324Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 324Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 326Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ............................................. 329Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 333Compact Spare Tire .................................. 334

Appearance Care ........................................ 335Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 335Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 337Leather ...................................................... 338Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 338Care of Safety Belts .................................. 339


246

Weatherstrips ............................................ 339Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 339Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 340Finish Care ............................................... 340Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 340Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 341Tires ......................................................... 342Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 342Finish Damage .......................................... 342Underbody Maintenance ............................ 342Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 343Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 343

Vehicle Identification .................................. 344Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 344Service Parts Identification Label ............... 345

Electrical System ........................................ 345Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 345Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 346Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 346Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 346Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 346Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 347Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 349

Capacities and Specifications .................... 352Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 353

Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 354


247

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

248

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

249

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 406.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 82.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Part E: MaintenanceRecord on page 384.

250

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating isless than 87, you may notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonly referred to asspark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you areusing gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 252 for additional information.

251

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label. If thisfuel is not available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 172. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.

252

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

253

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuelor refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter vehiclewhile pumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never let childrenpump fuel.

To open the fuel fillerdoor, pull up on therelease lever locatedon the floor on theoutboard side ofthe driver’s seat.

The tethered fuel capis located behind ahinged fuel door on thepassenger’s side ofthe vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

254

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 339.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fullyinstalled. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 172.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 172.

255

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

256

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handleinside the vehicle.It is located on thelower left sideof the instrumentpanel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle andlift up the secondary hood release lever.The secondary hood release lever is locatedunder the front center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from itsretainer and place the hood prop into the slotin the hood.

4. Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then lift the hood torelieve pressure on the hood prop. Removethe hood prop from the slot in the hoodand return the prop to its retainer. Lower thehood 12 inches (30 cm) above the vehicleand release it to latch fully. Check tomake sure the hood is closed and repeat theprocess if necessary.

257

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the engine, here is what you will see:

258

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 264.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 260.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 260.

D. Brake Fluid/Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 281and Hydraulic Clutch on page 266.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 279.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 273.

G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 349.

H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 280.

I. Battery. See Battery on page 284.

259

Engine Oil

If the engine oilpressure light appearson the instrumentcluster, check theengine oil levelright away.

For more information, see Oil Pressure Light onpage 175. You should check the engine oillevel regularly; this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 258for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

260

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the lower hole at the tip ofthe dipstick (B), you need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 352.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If theengine has so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper hole (A) that showsthe proper operating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 258for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range, betweenthe holes on the dipstick. Push the dipstick allthe way back in when you are through.

261

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

262

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.Failure to use the recommended oil canresult in engine damage not covered by yourwarranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all you need forgood performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine OilIf any one of these is true for you, use theshort trip/city maintenance schedule:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km).This is particularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling, such asfrequent driving in stop-and-go traffic.

• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrieron top of your vehicle.

• The vehicle is used for delivery service,police, taxi, or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oilto break down sooner. If any one of these istrue for your vehicle, change the oil and filter every3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whicheveroccurs first.

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highwaymaintenance schedule. Change the oil andfilter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months,whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under highway conditions willcause engine oil to break down slower.

263

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 258 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the engine air cleaner/filter every15,000 miles (25 000 km) and replace it every30,000 miles (50 000 km). If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove thefilter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filterto release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

264

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Remove the four screws that hold the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Put the cover back on tightly and tightenthe screws.

See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 358 for replacement intervals.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

265

Automatic Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle tothe dealership service department and have itrepaired as soon as possible. You may also haveyour fluid level checked by your dealer orservice center when you have your oil changed.

Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluidlabeled other than ESSO LT71141 orTOTAL ATF H50235 may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use ESSO LT71141or TOTAL ATF H50235 labeled automatictransaxle fluid.

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 382for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThere is one reservoir for both the brake and thehydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 281for more information.

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic fluid.

266

It is not necessary to regularly check the fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour master cylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Part B: Owner Checks and Serviceson page 374 and Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 382.

How to Check and Add Fluid

You do not need to check the fluid level unlessyou suspect a clutch problem. To check thefluid level, look on the side of the reservoir. If thefluid reaches the MAX (A) mark on the reservoir,the fluid level is correct. The reservoir islocated near the back of the engine compartmenton the driver’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 258 formore information on location.

267

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 271.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

268

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 382 for more information.

269

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rearof the engine compartment on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 258 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

To check the engine coolant, the vehicle must beon a level surface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be between theMaximum (A) and Minimum (B) marks on thecoolant surge tank. The level rises at engineoperation temperature and drops again when theengine cools down.

270

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool. If thecoolant surge tank is empty, a special fillprocedure is necessary. See Engine Overheatingon page 271 for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 171.

271

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it.Just turn it off and get everyone awayfrom the vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

272

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood, but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan

273

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.Make sure that the air conditioning is turned off.

The coolant level should be between the Minimumand Maximum marks on the coolant surge tankwhen the engine is cool. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

274

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not between theMinimum and Maximum marks, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and proper coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem, including the coolant surge tank pressurecap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 268 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

275

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a proper coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

276

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressure still left to bevented out the discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

277

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture to the Maximum mark on thecoolant surge tank. Wait about five minutes,then check to see if the level is below themark. If the level is below the Maximum mark,add additional coolant to bring the level upto the mark. Repeat this procedure untilthe level remains constant at the Maximummark for at least five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower than the Maximum mark, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolantsurge tank until the level reaches the mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.See your dealer, if necessary.

278

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluid reservoir is located towardthe front of the engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 258 for reservoirlocation.

It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down. Then check the fluid level.

The level should be between the MIN (B) andMAX (A) marks on the reservoir. If the levelis below the MIN (B) mark, add the power steeringfluid to the appropriate level. Replace the capand completely tighten it.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 382. Always use the proper fluid. Failureto use the proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

279

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 258for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as well aswasher fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

280

Brakes

Brake FluidThe master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 258for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when the linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 168.

281

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 382.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap andthe area around the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 339.

282

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 381.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

283

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have reallygood braking. Your vehicle was designed andtested with top-quality GM brake parts. When youreplace parts of the braking system — forexample, when the brake linings wear down andyou need new ones put in — be sure you get newapproved GM replacement parts. If you do not,the brakes might not work properly. For example,if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between the frontand rear brakes can change — for the worse.The braking performance you have come to expectcan change in many other ways if someoneputs in the wrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 258 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 285 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

284

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do not want.You would not be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure.Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

285

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on each vehicle. Yourvehicle’s positive (+) terminal is located undera red tethered cap on the battery. Thenegative (–) terminal is located under a blacktethered cap on the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 258 for moreinformation on location. Flip the caps up toaccess the positive (+) and negative (–)terminals.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.


286


But if a battery has filler caps, be surethe right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

287

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cableto the positive (+)terminal of thedead battery.

Use a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect theother end of thenegative (−) cable atleast 18 inches(45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, butnot near engineparts that move.

The electrical connection is just as goodthere, and the chance of sparks getting backto the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

288

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (–) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the caps over the positive (+) andnegative (–) terminals to their originalpositions.

Jumper Cable Removal

289

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustmentto the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if itis difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontalaim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beamheadlamps at you (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 301.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 257 for more information.

2. For wagon models, remove the two bolts fromthe top of the headlamp assembly and onenut on the inside that retains the headlampassembly.For hatchback models, remove the four screwsand the radiator grill. Then remove thethree bolts and the headlamp assembly.

290

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector fromthe rear of the bulb.

4. Remove the headlamp cap (A for thelow-beam or B for the high-beam headlamp)by turning it counterclockwise.

5. Release the spring that retains the bulb.

6. Remove the old bulb.

7. Install a new bulb.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to install theheadlamp assembly.

Wagon Models

Hatchback Models

291

Front Turn Signal and Parking LampsTo replace a front turn signal or parking lampbulb, do the following:


2. Remove the two bolts from the top of theheadlamp assembly and one nut on theinside that retains the headlamp assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.4. Pull the bulb socket out of the lamp housing.

5. Press the bulb inward and turn itcounterclockwise to remove it from thebulb socket.

6. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket bypressing it in and turning it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamphousing by turning it clockwise.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 to install theassembly.

Wagon Models

Hatchback Models

292

Turn Signal Lamps (Side)Your vehicle may have this side turn signal lamp.It will be located between the front door andthe wheel well. To replace this bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Locate the bulb by reaching underneath thevehicle where the side turn signal lamp islocated.

2. Remove the side turn signal lamp assemblyby pulling it forward.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing bypulling the bulb straight out of the socket.

5. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket bypushing it in and turning it clockwise.

6. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly backinto its original position.

293

Sidemarker Lamps (Front)To replace a front sidemarker bulb, do thefollowing:


2. Remove the headlamp assembly.

3. Turn the front sidemarker bulb socketcounterclockwise.

4. Pull the front sidemarker bulb socket out ofthe front bumper.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulbsocket.

6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to install theassembly.

294

Sidemarker Lamps (Rear)To replace a rear sidemarker bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Reach inside of the rear bumper and locatethe socket.

2. Turn the rear sidemarker bulb socketcounterclockwise.

3. Pull the rear sidemarker bulb socket out ofthe rear bumper.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulbsocket.

5. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install thebulb socket.

295

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Hatchback)To replace a CHMSL bulb on a hatchback model,do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 99for more information.

2. Pry off the trim from the liftgate and removethe two screws.

3. Remove the bulb socket from the lamphousing.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Install the new bulb.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelamp assembly.

296

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Wagon)To replace a CHMSL bulb on a wagon model,do the following:


2. Remove the two screws and the liftgatetrim cover.

3. Remove the bulb socket from the lamphousing.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out ofthe bulb socket.


6. Reinstall the liftgate trim cover and securewith the two screws to secure.

297

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (Hatchback)To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 99 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws and the taillampassembly.

3. Remove the bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise from the taillamp assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressingthe bulb and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Install the appropriate new bulb into thesocket.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the lampassembly.

298

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps (Wagon)To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:


2. Remove the two screws from the taillampassembly.

3. Remove the taillamp assembly from thevehicle.

4. Remove the bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise from the taillamp assembly.



7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install the lampassembly.

299

Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-upLamps (Hatchback)To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:


2. Remove the protective cover.

3. Remove the bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise.



6. Reinstall the protective cover.

300

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp towardyou through the opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.


5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps Bulb NumberBack-up 94535571CHMSL, Front andRear Sidemarker 94535587

License Plate Lamp 94535587Headlamps

High-Beam 94535541Low-Beam 94535546

Stoplamp and Taillamp 94535574Turn Signal - Front andParking Lamp 94535578

Turn Signal - Rear 94535572

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

301

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check”for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For the proper type,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 353.

Here is how to remove and replace the windshieldwiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiperblade off the arm.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

302

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 236.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 311.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

303

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger car tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger Car Tire Example

304

(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 320.

(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 311and Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See Compact Spare Tire on page 334 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 324.

Compact Spare Tire Example

305

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried andthe maximum pressure needed to supportthat load. See Compact Spare Tire on page 334and Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 311.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporary use only.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

306

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as itis wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and the speed ratingof a tire. The load range represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a tire is certified tocarry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may bemade from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

307

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 311.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

308

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 236.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 311 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 236.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

309

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 317.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 320.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 236.

310

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific tire and loading informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 236. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire. Foradditional information regarding the compact sparetire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 334.

311

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

312

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

313

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warningsymbol on the instrument panel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning symbol comes on ateach ignition cycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure.

The tire pressure warning light may come on incool weather when the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive. This couldbe an early indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 236,for an example of the tire information label andits location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 311.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you abouta low tire pressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 316 and Tireson page 303.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.See your dealer for service if all TPMS sensors areinstalled and the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on and stays on.

314

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched,to the tire/wheel positions, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tireusing a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealerfor service.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry and Science Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industryand Science Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

315

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 317and Wheel Replacement on page 322 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See Part A:Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 358.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on thetire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 236 for an example ofthe tire and loading information label and where itis located on your vehicle.

316

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 352.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 324.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

317

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need,look at the tire and loading information labelattached to your vehicle. See Loading YourVehicle on page 236 for a label example andwhere it is attached to your vehicle.Make sure the replacements are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct



size, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 334.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

318

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 318 andAccessories and Modifications on page 249 foradditional information.

319

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum selection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the Unites States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (11⁄2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction — AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

320

Temperature — A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

321

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 324 for moreinformation.

322

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

Notice: Use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use only SAE Class“S” type chains that are the proper size foryour tires. Install them on the front tiresand tighten them as tightly as possible withthe ends securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast or spinningthe wheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle.

323

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

324

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or even killed. Find alevel place to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever

in PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you should put blocks at the frontand rear of the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be the tireon the other side, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

325

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe tools you will be using to change a flat tireare shown below. Refer to your vehicle model toaccess the spare tire and tools.

A. JackB. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack HandleD. Screwdriver

Wagon ModelsFor wagon models, do the following to access thespare tire and tools:


2. Fold the floor cover by pulling the handleupward.

3. Lift the floor tray.

4. Release the prop from its retainer and put theprop into the slot.

326

5. Turn the retainer on the compact spare tirecounterclockwise and remove the retainer.

6. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 334 for more information.

7. To access the tools, pull the strap on the toolbox cover upward. The tools are locatedinside the foam tray.

327

Hatchback ModelsFor hatchback models, do the following to accessthe spare tire and tools:


2. Remove the trim cover by pulling up on the tab.

3. Remove the foam tray that contains the tools.

4. Turn the retainer on the compact spare tirecounterclockwise and remove the retainer.

5. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 334 for more information.

6. Remove the jack by turning the jack retainer,located on the right side of the jack,counterclockwise to release it. The jack islocated in the trunk, in front of the compactspare tire.

7. Then remove the jack handle and the wheelwrench. The jack handle and the wheelwrench are located inside the foam tray.

328

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, use the jack

handle to begin loosening the wheel covers.Using the flat end of the jack handle orthe screwdriver, pry along the edge of thewheel cover until it comes off.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

3. Locate the notch near each wheel in theframe which the jack head fits in.Position the jack and raise the jack head untilit fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’sframe nearest the flat tire.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

329

5. Insert the jack handle into the jack and thewheel wrench onto the end of the jack handle.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

6. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneath thewheel well.

7. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning themcounterclockwise.

8. Remove the flat tire.

330

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

9. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces andspare wheel.

10. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

11. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand clockwise until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

12. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

331

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 352for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 352 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

13. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the cargo area until you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

332

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store a flat or spare tire, do the following:

1. Put the flat or spare tire in the compact sparetire compartment, then secure the retainer.

2. Store the jack in its housing in the cargo area.Secure the jack by turning the retainerclockwise.

3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray andplace the tray on top of the tire.

4. Replace the trim cover.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 334.

333

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 50 mph (80 km/h), so you can finish yourtrip and have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. Of course, it is best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.Your spare will last longer and be in good shapein case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

334

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

335

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.

336

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

337

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

338

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residuecompletely. Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 343. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and notallowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

339

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 339.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 343.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

340

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Clean theblade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent.Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlyGM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

341

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame,floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

342

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

343

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

344

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 82.

345

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in thefuse block. An electrical overload will causethe lamps to turn off. If this happens, have yourheadlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links inthe wiring itself.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

346

There are spare fuses provided in the enginecompartment fuse block. If you ever have a problemon the road and do not have a spare fuse, you canborrow one that has the same amperage. Just picka feature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout — like the radio or cigarette lighter — anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace itas soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: theinstrument panel fuse block and the enginecompartment fuse block.

There is a fuse puller located on the enginecompartment fuse block. It can be used to easilyremove fuses from the fuse block.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuse block is located onthe end of the instrument panel, on the driver’sside of the vehicle. To access the fuses, open thefuse panel door by pulling out.

To reinstall the door, insert the tabs at the backend first, then push the door into the instrumentpanel to secure it.

347

Fuses UsageAIRBAG Airbag

WPR WiperRADIO/CLK Radio/Clock

ECM Engine Control Module

Fuses UsageAIRBAG AirbagAUX LTR Extra JackTRN SIGLAMPS Turn Signal Lamps

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

348

Fuses UsageLTR Cigarette Lighter

CLSTR BTSICluster, Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock/Automatic Transaxle ShiftLock (BTSI) Solenoid

RKE Remote Keyless EntryBCK/UP Back-upBLANK Not Used

TCM Transmission Control ModuleBLANK Not Used

ENG FUSEBOX DRL

Engine Fuse Box, Daytime RunningLamps

HAZRD LAMPS Hazard LampsA/C CLK Air Conditioning Switch, Clock

HVAC Heating, Ventilation and AirConditioning

RKE Remote Keyless EntryRADIO Radio

S/ROOF SunroofDLC Data Link Connector

SPARE Spare

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The engine compartment fuse block is located onthe driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 258for more information on location. To access thefuses, press in the top flap to release the cover.

To reinstall the cover, push the cover until it issecure.

349

Fuses UsageHEAD LAMPS Headlamps

ECM Engine Control ModuleI/P FUSE Instrument Panel Fuse

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

Fuses UsageA/C Air Conditioning

HORN HornHI BEAM Headlamp High-BeamDRIVER’S

PWR WNDW Driver’s Power Window

350

Fuses UsageSTOP LAMPS Stoplamps

DR/LCK Door LockMIR HTD Heated MirrorFRT FOG Front Fog

ILLUM LT License Plate Lamp, ParkingLamp Left

INJ Injector

ENG SNSR

Evaporative Emission (EVAP)Canister Purge Solenoid, HeatedOxygen Sensor (HO2S), CoolingFan Relay, CMP Sensor

LOW BEAM LT Headlamp Low-Beam Left

ILLUM RT Illumination Circuit, ParkingLamp Right

LOW BEAM RT Headlamp Low-Beam RightSPARE SpareSPARE SpareSPARE Spare

BATT PWR Battery PowerABS Anti-lock Brake System

HVAC BLWR HVAC BlowerIGN 2 Ignition 2

Fuses UsageIGN 1 Ignition 1

FUSE PLR Fuse PullerCOOL FAN

LOW Cooling Fan Low

DEFOG DefogCOOL FAN HI Cooling Fan HighPWR WNDW Power Window

Relays UsageCOOL FAN

LOW Cooling Fan Low

FRT FOG Front FogILLUM Illumination Relay

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorHORN Horn

DEFOG DefogFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

MAIN Main RelayCOOL FAN HI Cooling Fan HighPWR WNDW Power WindowHEAD LAMPS Headlamp Relay

351

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 382 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 7.9 qt 7.5 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.2 qt 4.0 L

Fuel Tank 14.5 gal 55.0 L

Transaxle, Automatic 7.3 qt 6.9 L

Transaxle, Manual 1.9 qt 1.8 L

Wheel Nut Torque 81 lb ft 110 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 (L34) Z Automatic andManual 0.039 inch (1.0mm)

352

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Part GM Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96553450

Engine Oil Filter 96458873

Fuel Filter 96335719

A/C Filter 96554378

Spark Plugs 93742299

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side 96478670

Passenger’s Side 96498696

Rear 96341429

353

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L L4 Engine

354

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 356Introduction ............................................... 356Maintenance Requirements ........................ 356Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 356How This Section is Organized ................. 356Part A: Scheduled Maintenance

Services ................................................. 358Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 358Selecting the Right Schedule ..................... 359Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..... 361Long Trip/Highway Scheduled

Maintenance .......................................... 369Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 374At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 374At Least Once a Month ............................. 374

At Least Twice a Year .............................. 375At Least Once a Year ............................... 376Part C: Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ............................................. 380Steering, Suspension and Front

Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ...... 380Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 380Fuel System Inspection ............................. 380Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 381Throttle System Inspection ........................ 381Brake System Inspection ........................... 381Part D: Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .............................................. 382Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 384

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

355

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary to keep yourvehicle in good working condition. Any damagecaused by failure to follow scheduled maintenancemay not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided intofive parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”explains what to have done and how often. Someof these services can be complex, so unlessyou are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should let yourGM dealer’s service department do these jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supportedservice people that will perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.

356

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 250.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 406.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells youwhat should be checked and when. It alsoexplains what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that your dealer’sservice department can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary tohelp keep your vehicle properly maintained. Theseproducts, or their equivalents, should be usedwhether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place foryou to record and keep track of the maintenanceperformed on your vehicle. Keep yourmaintenance receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

357

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance serviceswhich are to be performed at the mileage intervalsspecified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive shortdistances only a few times a week. Or youmay drive long distances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You may use your vehicle inmaking deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, todo errands, or in many other ways.

Because of the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services youshould have done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service people will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin Part D. Make sure whoever services yourvehicle uses these. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you oranyone else drives the vehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these onthe Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 236.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 251.

358

Selecting the Right ScheduleFirst you will need to decide which of thetwo schedules is right for your vehicle. Hereis how to decide which schedule to follow:

Short Trip/City DefinitionFollow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenanceif any one of these conditions is true for yourvehicle:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km).This is particularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling, such asfrequent driving in stop-and-go traffic.

• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,police, taxi, or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this scheduleif you operate your vehicle under any of theseconditions is that these conditions cause engine oilto break down sooner.

Short Trip/City Intervals

Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil andFilter Change and Engine Oil Pan Drain PlugWasher Replacement (or 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).

Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Inspection. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Replacement. Spark PlugReplacement. EVAP System Service. PCVSystem Service. Timing Belt Inspection.Brake/Clutch Fluid Change (or 24 months,whichever occurs first).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark PlugWire Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement.EVAP System Solenoid Valve Replacement.

359

Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel FilterReplacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): CoolingSystem Service.

These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete scheduledmaintenance on the following pages.

Long Trip/Highway DefinitionFollow this scheduled maintenance only if none ofthe conditions from the Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenance are true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle is driven in a dusty area or used offpaved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedulefor these conditions.

Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engineunder highway conditions will cause engine oil tobreak down slower.

Long Trip/Highway IntervalsEvery 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil andFilter Change and Engine Oil Pan Drain PlugWasher Replacement (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Inspection. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Replacement. Spark PlugReplacement. EVAP System Service. PCVSystem Service. Timing Belt Inspection.Brake/Clutch Fluid Change (or 24 months,whichever occurs first).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark PlugWire Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement.EVAP System Solenoid Valve Replacement.

Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel FilterReplacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): CoolingSystem Service.These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete scheduledmaintenance on the following pages.

360

Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should berepeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 374 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 380.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is duringtire rotation. See Brake System Inspectionon page 381.

3,000 Miles (5 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter and replace engine

oil pan drain plug washer (or every 3 months,whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.



❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 316 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)



361






❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, thefilter may require replacement more often.

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter and replaceengine oil pan drain plug washer. If necessary,replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at everyengine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 264 for more information.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).








❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 316 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +)

362






❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 264 for moreinformation.


❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.

❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAPvent solenoid valve. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first).






363









❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at everyengine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 264 for more information.







364












❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Replace timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines.

Replace EVAP vent solenoid valve. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)





365












❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at everyengine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 264 for more information.





366










❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 264 for more information.



❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP

vent solenoid valve. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)



367








150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This

service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 268 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and neck. Pressure test the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

368

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should berepeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 374 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 380.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection onpage 381.







❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 264 for more information.



369










❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP







370
















❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Replace timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines.

Replace EVAP vent solenoid valve. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

371



















372



❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and EVAP







150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This

service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 268 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and neck. Pressure test the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

373

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control performance of yourvehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 260 forfurther details.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 268 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 280 for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect the tires and make sure the tiresare inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 311.

374

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.)

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 340.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 382.

Automatic Transaxle CheckIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. Check for leaks. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to your dealer and have it repairedas soon as possible.

375

Manual Transaxle CheckIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. Have the system inspectedand repaired if needed.

Clutch and Brake Pedal Free PlayCheckCheck the clutch pedal and brake pedal for freeplay and adjust as necessary.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondarylatch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,hood and body door hinges, rear compartment,and any folding seat hardware. Part D tellsyou what to use. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment.

376

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 116if necessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The starter shouldwork only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, yourvehicle needs service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway and try to start the engine.The starter should work only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the starter works when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, your vehicleneeds service.

377

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 116 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), yourvehicle needs service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P).

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition shouldturn to LOCK only when you press the keyrelease button.

On all vehicles, the ignition key should come outonly in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.

378

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

379

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed in this part are inspections and serviceswhich should be performed at least twice ayear (for instance, each spring and fall). Youshould let your dealer’s service departmentdo these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services maybe found in a service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 406.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectthe power steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot sealsfor damage, tears or leakage. Replace sealsif necessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect thebody near the exhaust system. Look for broken,damaged, missing or out-of-position parts aswell as open seams, holes, loose connections orother conditions which could cause a heatbuild-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumesinto the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 121.

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damageor leaks.

380

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.Clean the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap is recommended at least oncea year.

Throttle System InspectionInspect the throttle system for interference orbinding, and for damaged or missing parts.Replace parts as needed. Replace anycomponents that have high effort or excessivewear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruisecontrol cables.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect otherbrake parts, including calipers, parking brake,etc. You may need to have your brakes inspectedmore often if your driving habits or conditionsresult in frequent braking.

381

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 260.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 268.


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

AutomaticTransaxle

Automatic Transaxle Fluid ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235(GM Part No. in Canada 89021903).

ManualTransaxle

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ManualTransaxle Shift

Linkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

382


ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

383

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed theservice and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on thefollowing record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

384

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


385

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


386

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 388Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 388Online Owner Center ................................. 391Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 392Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 392GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 394Roadside Assistance Program ................... 394Courtesy Transportation ............................. 398Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 400Collision Damage Repair ........................... 401

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 405Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 405Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 405Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 406Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 406

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

387

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

388

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicleage, mileage, and other factors. General Motorsreserves the right to change eligibility limitationsand/or discontinue its participation in this program.

389

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners:In the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,General Motors of Canada Limited wants youto be aware of its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program. General Motorsof Canada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, from the time you fileyour complaint to the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantages over courts inmost jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

390

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for yourGM ownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the MyGM Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.

391

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who useText Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

392

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

393

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

394

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in Canada).Service to provide diesel may be restricted. Forsafety reasons, propane and other alternativefuels will not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership. Inthe U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

395

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlightingyour choice of either the most direct route orthe most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)

and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

396

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

397

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

398

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through a friend or relative,limited reimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supported by originalreceipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

399

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitor

conditions for airbag deployment and, if the vehiclehas the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

400

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or ownermanual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built.

401

Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice toassure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved. The use ofGenuine GM parts can help maintain your GM NewVehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

402

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make sure thatno one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 394 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

403

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but youmust live with the repair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurance company may initiallyvalue the repair using aftermarket parts. Discussthis with your repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

404

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

405

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainlyhope you will notify General Motors. Please callthe Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

406

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US+ Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US+ Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

407

✍ NOTES

408

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 249Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 152Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 83Additives, Fuel ............................................ 252Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 345Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 264Air Conditioning ........................................... 155Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 165Readiness Light ....................................... 164

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 400

Airbag System ............................................... 66Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 73Passenger Sensing System ....................... 76Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 74When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 71Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 69

Antenna, Integrated Windshield ................... 204

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 211Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 169Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 341Care of Safety Belts ................................ 339Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 343Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 340Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 335Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 337Finish Care .............................................. 340Finish Damage ......................................... 342Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 338Leather .................................................... 338Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 342Tires ........................................................ 342Underbody Maintenance ........................... 342Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 343Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 339Weatherstrips ........................................... 339Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 340

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 153Audio System(s) .......................................... 178

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 202Care of Your CD Player ........................... 204Care of Your CDs .................................... 203Integrated Windshield Antenna ................. 204

409

Audio System(s) (cont.)Radio with CD ......................................... 180Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 186Understanding Radio Reception ............... 203

Automatic TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 266Operation ................................................. 110

BBattery ........................................................ 284

Inadvertent Power Saver .......................... 152Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 227Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 211Emergencies ............................................ 213Parking .................................................... 116System Inspection .................................... 381System Warning Light .............................. 168

Brakes ........................................................ 281Braking ....................................................... 210Braking in Emergencies ............................... 213Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 105Bulb Replacement ....................................... 290

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ...................... 296, 297

Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ......... 292

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 290Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 290Headlamps ............................................... 290License Plate Lamps ................................ 301Replacement Bulbs .................................. 301Sidemarker Lamps .......................... 294, 295Taillamps, Stoplamps and

Back-Up Lamps ..................................... 300Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ....... 298Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 299Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 293

Buying New Tires ........................................ 318

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 252California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 249Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 352Carbon Monoxide ............... 99, 121, 231, 243Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 339Your CD Player ........................................ 204Your CDs ................................................. 203

Cargo Shade ............................................... 130

410

CD, MP3 ............................................ 194, 198Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ......................... 296, 297Center Rear Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 36Chains, Tire ................................................. 323Charging System Light ................................ 167Check

Engine Light ............................................ 172Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 256Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 343Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 45Infants and Young Children ........................ 41Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .................................................. 51Older Children ........................................... 38Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 59Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 62Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 50

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 153Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 341Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 340Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 337

Cleaning (cont.)Finish Care .............................................. 340Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 335Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 338Leather .................................................... 338Tires ........................................................ 342Underbody Maintenance ........................... 342Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 339Weatherstrips ........................................... 339Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 340

Climate Control System ............................... 155Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 159Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 159

Clock .......................................................... 154Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 266Collision Damage Repair ............................. 401Compact Spare Tire .................................... 334Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 210Convenience Net ......................................... 129Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 171Heater, Engine ......................................... 109Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 271

Cooling System ........................................... 273Cruise Control ............................................. 145Cruise Control Light .................................... 176

411

Cupholder(s) ................................................ 126Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 398Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 392Customer Assistance Offices .................... 392Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 388GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 394Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 406Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 405Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 405Roadside Assistance Program .................. 394Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 406

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 149Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 176Defensive Driving ........................................ 206Disc, MP3 .......................................... 194, 198Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 250Dome Lamp ................................................ 151

DoorAjar Light ................................................. 177Central Door Unlocking System ................. 96Door Ajar Reminder ................................... 97Locks ......................................................... 95Power Door Locks ..................................... 96Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 97

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 23Seat Tilt Adjuster ....................................... 11

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 220City .......................................................... 225Defensive ................................................. 206Drunken ................................................... 207Freeway ................................................... 226Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 229In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 222Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 236Winter ...................................................... 231

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 345Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 349

412

Electrical System (cont.)Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 346Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 346Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 347Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 346Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 346

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 264Battery ..................................................... 284Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 172Coolant .................................................... 268Coolant Heater ......................................... 109Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 171Cooling System Inspection ....................... 381Drive Belt Routing .................................... 354Engine Compartment Overview ................ 258Exhaust ................................................... 121Oil ........................................................... 260Overheating ............................................. 271Starting .................................................... 107

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 400Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 37Exterior Lamps ............................................ 148

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 264Finish Damage ............................................ 342Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 140Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 143Flat Tire ...................................................... 324Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 324Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 333Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 266Manual Transaxle ..................................... 266Power Steering ........................................ 279Windshield Washer .................................. 280

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 176Fog Lamps .................................................. 150Front Armrest Storage Area ......................... 128Front Storage Area ...................................... 127Fuel ............................................................ 251

Additives .................................................. 252California Fuel .......................................... 252Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 256Filling Your Tank ...................................... 254Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 253

413

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 177Gasoline Octane ...................................... 251Gasoline Specifications ............................ 251Low Warning Light ................................... 178System Inspection .................................... 380

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 349Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 346Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 347Windshield Wiper ..................................... 346

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 171Fuel ......................................................... 177Speedometer ........................................... 163Tachometer .............................................. 163

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 251Specifications ........................................... 251

Glove Box ................................................... 126GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 394

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 140Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 290Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 346Headlamps .................................................. 290

Bulb Replacement .................................... 290Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 149Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 143Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ...... 292Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 290High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 142On Reminder ........................................... 149Sidemarker Lamps .......................... 294, 295Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 293

Heater ......................................................... 155Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ....................... 130Highbeam On Light ..................................... 176Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 228Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 229Hold Mode Light .......................................... 170Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 256Release ................................................... 257

414

Horn ............................................................ 140How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 266

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 106Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ................. 152Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 41Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 311Inspection

Brake System .......................................... 381Engine Cooling System ............................ 381Exhaust System ....................................... 380Fuel System ............................................ 380Part C - Periodic Maintenance ................. 380Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal .............................. 380Throttle System ........................................ 381

Instrument PanelOverview .................................................. 136

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 150Cluster ..................................................... 161

Integrated Windshield Antenna .................... 204

JJump Starting .............................................. 285

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 91Keys ............................................................. 89

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 304Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 151Exterior .................................................... 148Fog .......................................................... 150Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 152Map ......................................................... 151

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 51

License Plate Lamps ................................... 301Liftgate .......................................................... 99Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 164Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 169Brake System Warning ............................. 168

415

Light (cont.)Charging System ..................................... 167Cruise Control .......................................... 176Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 176Door Ajar ................................................. 177Fog Lamp ................................................ 176Highbeam On .......................................... 176Hold Mode ............................................... 170Low Fuel Warning .................................... 178Malfunction Indicator ................................ 172Oil Pressure ............................................. 175Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 165Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 164Safety Belt Reminder Tone ...................... 164Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)

Warning Light ....................................... 170Tire Pressure ........................................... 171Trunk Ajar ................................................ 177

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 236Lockout Protection ......................................... 98Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 96Door .......................................................... 95Lockout Protection ..................................... 98Power Door ............................................... 96Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 97

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenance ............................................ 369

Loss of Control ........................................... 219Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 178Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 12

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ...... 353Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 374At Least Once a Month ............................ 374At Least Once a Year .............................. 376At Least Twice a Year .............................. 375Brake System Inspection .......................... 381Engine Cooling System Inspection ........... 381Exhaust System Inspection ...................... 380Fuel System Inspection ............................ 380How This Section is Organized ................ 356Introduction .............................................. 356Long Trip/Highway Scheduled

Maintenance ......................................... 369Maintenance Requirements ...................... 356Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ............................................... 358

416

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Part B - Owner Checks and Services ...... 374Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ........................................... 380Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................. 382Part E - Maintenance Record ................... 384Selecting the Right Schedule ................... 359Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ...... 361Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection .............. 380Throttle System Inspection ....................... 381Using ....................................................... 358Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 356

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 172Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 12Manual Seats ........................................... 9, 10Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 266Operation ................................................. 114

Manual Windows ......................................... 100Map Lamps ................................................. 151Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 123Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 125

Mirrors (cont.)Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 125Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 123Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 124

MP3 ................................................... 194, 198MyGMLink.com ............................................ 391

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 105Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 353

OOdometer .................................................... 163Odometer, Trip ............................................ 163Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 216Oil

Engine ..................................................... 260Pressure Light .......................................... 175

Older Children, Restraints ............................. 38Online Owner Center ................................... 391Other Warning Devices ................................ 140Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 159Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 152

417

OutsideConvex Mirror .......................................... 125Heated Mirrors ......................................... 125Manual Mirrors ......................................... 123Power Mirrors .......................................... 124

Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 342Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 117Shifting Out of ......................................... 118

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 116Over Things That Burn ............................ 120

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 119Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 358Part B - Owner Checks and Services .......... 374Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ............................................... 380Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................ 382Part E - Maintenance Record ...................... 384Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 165Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 159

Passenger Sensing System ........................... 76Passing ....................................................... 217Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 152Door Locks ................................................ 96Electrical System ..................................... 346Inadvertent Battery Saver ......................... 152Steering Fluid .......................................... 279Windows .................................................. 101

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 37

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 22

RRadios ........................................................ 178

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 204Care of Your CDs .................................... 203Radio with CD ......................................... 180Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 186Understanding Reception ......................... 203

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 97Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 129Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 16Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 145

418

Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 123Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 242Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 91Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 92Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 329Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 326Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 301Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 405General Motors ........................................ 406United States Government ....................... 405

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 85Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 32Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 394Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 236Roof Rack Provisions .................................. 128Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 354Running the Engine While Parked ............... 122

SSafety Belt

Pretensioners ............................................. 37Reminder Light ........................................ 164Reminder Tone ........................................ 164

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 339Center Rear Passenger Position ................ 36Driver Position ........................................... 23How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 22Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32Safety Belt Extender .................................. 37Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Seats

Driver Seat Tilt Adjuster ............................. 11Head Restraints ......................................... 15Manual ................................................. 9, 10Manual Lumbar .......................................... 12Rear Seat Operation .................................. 16Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12

419

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 59Right Front Seat Position ........................... 62

Selecting the Right Schedule,Maintenance ............................................ 359

Service ........................................................ 248Accessories and Modifications .................. 249Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 251California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 249Doing Your Own Work ............................. 250Engine Soon Light ................................... 172Publications Ordering Information ............. 406

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 82Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 342Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 117Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 118Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ........ 361Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 142Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 334Installing .................................................. 329Removing ................................................ 326Storing ..................................................... 333

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 352Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)

Warning Light ........................................... 170Speedometer ............................................... 163Starting Your Engine ................................... 107Steering ...................................................... 214Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ................. 380Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 202Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 141Storage Areas ............................................. 126

Convenience Net ..................................... 129Cupholder(s) ............................................ 126Front Armrest Storage Area ...................... 128Front Storage Area .................................. 127Glove Box ................................................ 126Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ................... 130Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 129Roof Rack Provisions ............................... 128Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............ 127

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 235Sun Visors .................................................. 102Sunroof ....................................................... 131

420

TTachometer ................................................. 163Taillamps

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps .............. 300Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 298Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 299Theft-Deterrent System ................................ 103Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 103Throttle System Inspection .......................... 381Tilt Adjuster, Driver Seat ................................ 11Tilt Wheel .................................................... 141Time ........................................................... 154Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 171Tires ........................................................... 303

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 341Buying New Tires ..................................... 318Chains ..................................................... 323Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 324Cleaning .................................................. 342Compact Spare Tire ................................. 334Different Size ........................................... 319If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 324Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 311

Tires (cont.)Inspection and Rotation ............................ 316Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 329Pressure Monitor System ......................... 312Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 329Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 326Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ......... 333Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 304Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 307Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 320Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 321Wheel Replacement ................................. 322When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 317

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 242Towing a Trailer ....................................... 243Your Vehicle ............................................. 241

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 266Fluid, Manual ........................................... 266

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 110Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 114Trip Odometer ............................................. 163Trunk Ajar Light ........................................... 177Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 142Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 141

421

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 203Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 320

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 210Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 236Parking Your ............................................ 119Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 400

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 344Service Parts Identification Label .............. 345

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 159Visors .......................................................... 102

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 161Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 140Other Warning Devices ............................ 140

Warnings (cont.)Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 321Different Size ........................................... 319Replacement ............................................ 322

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 50Windows ..................................................... 100

Manual ..................................................... 100Power ...................................................... 101

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 144Washer Fluid ........................................... 280Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 302Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 340Wiper Fuses ............................................ 346Wipers ..................................................... 143

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 145Winter Driving ............................................. 231

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 356

422

2007 chevrolet optra owner manual m - general motors · pdf file2007 chevrolet optra owner...

Documents